Wasp Bar Code Scanner WLS 8400 ER User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WLS 8400  
Product Reference Guide  
February 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2005 by Wasp Technologies. All rights reserved.  
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical  
means, without permission in writing from Wasp Technologies. This includes electronic or  
mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems.  
The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to  
the user is on a licensed basis. Wasp Technologies grants to the user a non-transferable and non-  
exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program).  
Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by  
the user without prior written consent of Wasp Technologies. No right to copy a licensed program  
in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify,  
merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create  
a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written  
permission from Wasp Technologies. The user agrees to maintain Wasp Technologies’s copyright  
notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized  
copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or  
reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.  
Wasp Technologies reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve  
reliability, function, or design.  
Wasp Technologies does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the  
application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.  
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Wasp  
Technologies, intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits,  
and subsystems contained in Wasp Technologies products.  
Wasp Technologies is a registered trademark of Wasp Technologies. Other product names  
mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies  
and are hereby acknowledged.  
Wasp Technologies  
1400 10th St.  
Plano TX 75074  
http://www.waspbarcode.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
About This Guide  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Chapter Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Notational Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
Service Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
Wasp Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvii  
Chapter 1.  
Getting Started  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Unpacking the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Configuring the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Chapter 2.  
Scanning  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7  
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8  
Decode Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9  
Chapter 3.  
Maintenance and Technical Specifications  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4  
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7  
Scanner Signal Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9  
Chapter 4.  
User Preferences  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
User Preferences Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4  
User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5  
Set Default Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5  
Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5  
Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7  
Laser On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7  
Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8  
Trigger Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8  
Aim Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
v
Chapter 5.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Keyboard Wedge Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Intra-Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Caps Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Function Key Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Send Make and Break. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Keyboard Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
ASCII Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19  
Chapter 6.  
RS-232 Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Connecting an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
RS-232 Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
RS-232 Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
Software Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
Beep on <BEL>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Intercharacter Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Nixdorf Mode A/B and OPOS/JPOS Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . 6-24  
Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
ASCII / Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Chapter 7.  
USB Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Connecting a USB Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4  
USB Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6  
USB Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7  
USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8  
USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
USB Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Convert Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
ASCII Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Chapter 8.  
Symbologies  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Symbology Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6  
UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Enable/Disable EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vii  
Enable/Disable EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Transmit UPC-A/UPC-E/UPC-E1 Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
UPC-E Preamble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
UPC-E1 Preamble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21  
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Enable/Disable Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25  
Code 32 Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30  
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31  
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38  
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38  
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42  
Discrete 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Codabar (NW - 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46  
Enable/Disable Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46  
Set Lengths for Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
CLSI Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49  
NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49  
MSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53  
MSI Check Digit Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53  
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54  
RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54  
RSS Limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55  
Redundancy Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56  
Redundancy Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56  
Redundancy Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56  
Redundancy Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57  
Redundancy Level 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57  
Security Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58  
Security Level 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58  
Security Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58  
Security Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59  
Security Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59  
Bi-Directional Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60  
Chapter 9.  
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
ix  
Miscellaneous Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Transmit Code ID Character. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Scan Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Scan Data Transmission Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
FN1 Substitution Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Chapter 10.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Special Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10  
Quit Entering Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10  
Disable Rule Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Code Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28  
Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28  
Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47  
Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-53  
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . .10-54  
Send Right Control Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-97  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-97  
Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-105  
Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-107  
Appendix A.  
Standard Default Parameters  
Appendix B.  
Programming Reference  
Symbol Code Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
Appendix C.  
Sample Bar Codes  
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
UPC-E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
UPC-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
EAN-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
EAN-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Trioptic Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
MSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xi  
Appendix D.  
Numeric Bar Codes  
0, 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3  
2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-4  
5, 6, 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-5  
8, 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-6  
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-7  
Glossary  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Chapter Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv  
Notational Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi  
Service Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
WASP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xiv WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
Introduction  
The WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up,  
operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the scanner. The WLS 8400 includes the  
following variations of the scanner:  
•
•
WLS8400FZ: 1-D scanning  
WLS8400ER: extended range 1-D scanning.  
Chapter Descriptions  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview and unpacking  
instructions.  
Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions,  
and how to use the scanner in hand-held and hands-free modes.  
Chapter 3, Maintenance and Technical Specifications provides information on  
how to care for the scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.  
Chapter 4, User Preferences provides the programming bar codes necessary for  
selecting user preference features for the scanner.  
Chapter 5, Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the  
scanner for Keyboard Wedge operation.  
Chapter 6, RS-232 Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for  
RS-232 operation.  
Chapter 7, USB Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for USB  
operation.  
Chapter 8, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the  
programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the scanner.  
Chapter 9, Miscellaneous Scanner Options includes commonly used bar codes to  
customize how the data is transmitted to the host device.  
Chapter 10, Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) describes how to customize  
scanned data before transmitting to the host.  
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and  
miscellaneous scanner defaults.  
Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers,  
ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps.  
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
xvi WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
•
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for  
parameters requiring specific numeric values.  
Notational Conventions  
The following conventions are used in this document:  
•
Bullets (•) indicate:  
•
•
•
action items  
lists of alternatives  
lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.  
•
•
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as  
numbered lists.  
Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote  
default parameter settings.  
*Baud Rate 9600  
Feature/Option  
* Indicates Default  
Related Publications  
The WLS 8400 Quick Start Guide provides general information to help the user get started  
with the scanner. It includes basic set-up and operation instructions.  
For the latest versions of the WLS 8400 Quick Start Guide and the WLS 8400 Product  
Reference Guide go to: http://www.waspbarcode.com.  
Service Information  
If there is a problem with the equipment, contact the local Wasp Support. See page xvii for  
contact information. Before calling, have the model number, serial number, and several of  
the bar code symbols at hand.  
Call Wasp Support from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person  
can try to talk through the problem. If the equipment is found to be working properly and  
the problem is symbol readability, Wasp Support will request samples of the bar codes for  
analysis at our plant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
xvii  
If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, the equipment may need to be returned for  
servicing. If that is necessary, specific directions will be given.  
Wasp Technologies is not responsible for any damages  
incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is  
not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the  
warranty. If the original shipping container was not kept,  
contact Wasp Technologies to request another container.  
Wasp Support  
For service information, warranty information or technical assistance contact or call Wasp  
Support at:  
1400 10th Street  
Plano, TX 75074  
214-547-4100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
xviii WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Getting Started  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Unpacking the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Installing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7  
Configuring the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1-3  
Introduction  
The scanner combines excellent scanning performance and advanced ergonomics to  
provide the best value in a lightweight laser scanner. Whether used as a hand-held scanner  
or in hands-free mode in a stand, the scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended  
periods of time.  
Figure 1-1. WLS 8400 Scanner  
This scanner supports:  
•
•
Standard RS-232 connection to a host.  
Keyboard Wedge connection to a host, where scanned data is interpreted  
keystrokes. The following international keyboards are supported (for WindowsTM  
environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian,  
Swedish, UK English, Japanese, and Brazilian-Portuguese.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
•
USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the  
HID keyboard interface type. Other USB interface types may be selected by  
scanning programming bar codes. The following international keyboards are  
supported (for Windows™ environment): North America, German, French, French  
Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Japanese, and Brazilian-  
Portuguese.  
Unpacking the Scanner  
Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged  
in transit, call Wasp Support at one of the telephone numbers listed on page xvii. KEEP  
THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment  
ever needs to be returned for servicing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
1-5  
Setting Up the Scanner  
Installing the Interface Cable  
1. Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the scanner and gently  
pull the clamp away from the bottom of the scanner.  
2. Open the clamp and plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable  
interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle.  
3. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
4. Close the clamp, push it back into place and tighten the screws on the clamp to  
secure the cable into the bottom of the scanner.  
5. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter  
for information on host connections).  
Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors  
illustrated in each host chapter are examples only. The connectors  
may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the  
scanner remain the same.  
Connecting Power (if required)  
If the host does not provide power to the scanner, an external power connection is required  
to power the scanner. To connect power:  
1. Connect the interface cable to the bottom of the scanner, as described in Installing  
the Interface Cable on page 1-5.  
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to  
locate the correct port).  
3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end  
of the power supply into an AC outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting Started  
1-7  
Removing the Interface Cable  
1. Loosen the two screws on the cable clamp at the bottom of the scanner and gently  
pull the clamp away from the bottom of the scanner.  
2. Open the clamp and unplug the interface cable modular connector from the cable  
interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle. Carefully slide out the cable.  
3. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-5 to connect a new  
cable.  
Configuring the Scanner  
Use the bar codes included in this manual to configure the scanner. See Chapter 4, User  
Preferences and each host chapter for information about programming the scanner using  
bar code menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Scanning  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Beeper Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning  
2-3  
Introduction  
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar  
codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.  
Scan  
Tether Plate  
LED  
Indicators  
Scan Trigger  
Figure 2-1. Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Beeper Definitions  
The scanner emits different beeper sequences and patterns to indicate its status. Table 2-1  
defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the  
scanner.  
Table 2-1. Standard Beeper Definitions  
Beeper Sequence  
Standard Use  
Indication  
Short low/short medium/short high  
beep sequence  
Power up.  
1 short high beep  
4 long low beeps  
A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled).  
A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is  
ignored.  
5 long low beeps  
Conversion or format error.  
Short high/short high/short high/long RS-232 receive error.  
low beep sequence  
Parameter Menu Scanning  
Long low/long high beep sequence  
Incorrect programming sequence or ‘Cancel’ bar code scanned.  
Scanner remains in program mode.  
Short high/short low beep sequence  
Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad.  
Short high/short low/short high/short Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting.  
low beep sequence  
Short low/short high/short low/short Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Set Default Parameter on  
high beep sequence  
page 4-5.  
USB only  
4 short high beeps  
Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and  
scan again.  
Short low/short medium/short high  
Communication with the bus must be established before the scanner  
beep sequence after scanning a USB can operate at the highest power level.  
Device Type.  
Short low/short medium/short high  
The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the  
beep sequence occurs more than once. scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and  
usually happens when the PC cold boots.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning  
2-5  
Table 2-1. Standard Beeper Definitions (Continued)  
Beeper Sequence  
Indication  
RS-232 only  
1 short high beep  
A <BEL> character is received and Beep on <BEL> is enabled.  
LED Definitions  
In addition to beeper sequences, the scanner uses the two-color LED to indicate its status.  
Table 2-2 defines LED colors that display during scanning.  
Table 2-2. Standard LED Definitions  
LED  
Indication  
Off  
The scanner is on and ready to scan, or no power is applied to the  
scanner.  
Green  
Red  
A bar code was successfully decoded.  
A data transmission error occurred.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Scanning in Hand-Held Mode  
Install and program the scanner (see Setting Up the Scanner on page 1-5). For assistance,  
contact the local supplier or Wasp Support.  
1. Ensure the scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host  
chapter).  
2. Aim the scanner at the bar code.  
3. Press the scan trigger.  
Figure 2-2. Scanning in Hand-Held Mode  
4. Ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol.  
WRONG  
RIGHT  
012345  
012345  
5. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps, and the LED turns green. For more  
information on beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning  
2-7  
Aiming  
Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. Laser light reflecting directly back into  
the scanner from the bar code is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection can  
make decoding difficult.  
The scanner can be tilted up to 65° forward or back and achieve a successful decode (Figure  
2-3). Simple practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within.  
65°  
65°  
Figure 2-3. Optimum Scan Angles  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Scanning in Hands-Free Mode  
The optional IntelliStand adds greater flexibility to the scanning operation. When the  
scanner is seated in the stand’s “cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in  
hands-free mode. When the scanner is removed from the stand it operates in its normal  
hand-held mode.  
Adjust angle of  
scanner “cup”  
Adjust height  
Scanner “Cup”  
of IntelliStand  
Figure 2-4. Inserting the Scanner in the IntelliStand  
To operate the scanner in the IntelliStand:  
1. Ensure the scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host  
chapter for information on host connections).  
2. Insert the scanner into the IntelliStand by placing the front of the scanner into the  
stand’s “cup” (see Figure 2-4).  
3. To scan a bar code, present the bar code and ensure the scan line crosses every bar  
and space of the symbol.  
4. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more  
information on beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning  
2-9  
Decode Zone  
in. cm  
30 76.2  
20 50.8  
10 25.4  
Note: Typical performance at 68˚F (20˚C)  
on high quality Code 39 and UPC symbols.  
W
i
d
t
h
LS 3408  
FZ  
0
0
o
f
5 mil  
F
i
e
l
2.5"  
2.0"  
7.25"  
7.5 mil  
13 mil  
10 25.4  
20 50.8  
30 76.2  
15.75"  
d
1.0"  
24"  
100% UPC  
20 mil (80%MRD)  
20 mil (31%MRD)  
39.5"  
0"*  
26.5"  
40 mil  
2.0"*  
67.0"  
55 mil  
4.0"*  
84.0"  
in.  
cm  
0
0
10  
25.4  
20  
50.8  
30  
76.2  
40  
101.6  
50  
127.0  
60  
152.4  
70  
177.8  
80  
203.2  
90  
228.6  
Depth of Field  
*Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle  
Figure 2-5. WLS 8400FZ Decode Zone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
in. cm  
12 30.5  
W
i
d
t
Note: Typical performance at 73.4˚F (23˚C)  
on high quality Code 39 symbols.  
8
4
0
4
8
20.3  
10.2  
0
h
LS 3408  
ER  
o
f
10.2  
20.3  
7.5 mil  
0.25"  
20"  
F
i
e
l
10 mil  
15 mil  
20 mil  
2"  
3"  
3"  
32"  
12 30.5  
69"  
d
94"  
in.  
cm  
0
0
10  
25.4  
20  
50.8  
30  
76.2  
40  
101.6  
50  
127.0  
60  
152.4  
70  
177.8  
80  
203.2  
90  
228.6  
100  
254.0  
Depth of Field  
in. cm  
W
i
d
t
72 182.9  
48 121.9  
24 61.0  
Note: Typical performance at 73.4˚F (23˚C)  
on high quality Code 39 symbols.  
h
LS 3408  
ER  
0
0
o
f
24 61.0  
48 121.9  
72 182.9  
F
i
e
l
55 mil  
15"  
180"  
70 mil reflective  
100 mil reflective  
365"  
d
*
540"  
in.  
cm  
0
0
60  
152.4  
120  
304.8  
180  
457.2  
240  
609.6  
300  
762.0  
360  
914.4  
420  
1066.8  
480  
1219.2  
540  
1371.6  
600  
1524.0  
Depth of Field  
*Near range determined by degree of reflectivity and width of bar code.  
Figure 2-6. WLS 8400ER Decode Zone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Maintenance and Technical  
Specifications  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Scanner Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Technical Specifications  
3-3  
Introduction  
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical  
specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).  
Maintenance  
Cleaning the scan window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window may affect  
scanning accuracy.  
•
•
•
•
Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.  
Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.  
Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.  
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly onto the window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Troubleshooting  
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Causes  
Possible Solutions  
Scanner emits short low/short  
medium/short high beep sequence.  
Scanner is powering up.  
Normal when scanner is plugged  
in.  
Nothing happens when scan trigger No power to the scanner.  
is pressed.  
Check the system power. Ensure  
the power supply is connected if  
the configuration requires a power  
supply.  
Power supply is not plugged in.  
Incorrect host interface cable is  
used.  
Ensure that correct host interface  
cable is used.  
Interface/power cables are loose.  
Ensure all cable connections are  
secure.  
Scanner is disabled.  
For Simple Serial Interface (SSI),  
enable the scanner via the host  
interface. Otherwise, see the  
technical person in charge of  
scanning.  
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, Assert CTS line.  
CTS is not asserted.  
Scanner emits short low/short  
The USB bus may put the scanner Normal during host reset.  
medium/short high beep sequence in a state where power to the  
more than once.  
scanner is cycled on and off more  
than once.  
Laser comes on, but scanner does Scanner is not programmed for the Ensure the scanner is programmed  
not decode the bar code.  
correct bar code type.  
to read the type of bar code being  
scanned.  
Bar code symbol is unreadable.  
Check the symbol to ensure it is not  
defaced. Try scanning test bar  
codes of the same bar code type.  
See Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes  
for test bar codes.  
Bar code is out of range from the Move scanner closer to or further  
scanner. from bar code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance and Technical Specifications  
3-5  
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued)  
Problem  
Possible Causes  
Possible Solutions  
Scanner emits 4 short high beeps Scanner has not completed USB  
while attempting to scan. initialization.  
Wait several seconds and scan  
again.  
Bar code is decoded, but data is not Scanner is not programmed for the Scan the appropriate host  
transmitted to the host.  
correct host type.  
parameter bar codes.  
Interface cable is loose.  
Ensure all cable connections are  
secure.  
If 4 long low beeps are heard, a  
transmission error was detected.  
Ensure the scanner's  
communication parameters match  
the host's setting.  
If 5 long low beeps are heard, a  
conversion or format error was  
detected.  
Ensure the scanner's conversion  
parameters are properly  
configured.  
Scanned data is incorrectly  
displayed on the host.  
Scanner is not programmed to  
work with the host.  
Ensure proper host is selected.  
For RS-232, ensure the scanner's  
communication parameters match  
the host's settings.  
For a Keyboard Wedge  
configuration, ensure the system is  
programmed for the correct  
keyboard type, and the CAPS  
LOCK key is off.  
Ensure editing options (e.g., UPC-  
E to UPC-A conversion) are  
properly programmed.  
Scanner emits short high/short  
high/short high/long low beep  
sequence when it is not in use.  
RS-232 receive error.  
Normal during host reset.  
Otherwise, ensure the scanner's  
RS-232 parity setting matches the  
host setting.  
Scanner emits long low/long high Input error or ’Cancel’ bar code is Ensure the correct numeric bar  
beep sequence while it is being  
programming.  
scanned.  
codes, that are within range for the  
parameter that is being  
programmed, are being scanned.  
Scanner emits short low/short high/ Out of ADF parameter storage  
short low/short high beep sequence space.  
while it is being programming.  
Erase all rules and re-program with  
shorter rules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued)  
Problem  
Possible Causes  
Possible Solutions  
Scanner emits a short low/short  
The USB bus re-establishes power Normal when the USB host type is  
medium/short high beep sequence to the scanner.  
after changing USB host type.  
changed.  
Scanner emits 1 short high beep  
when it is not in use.  
In RS-232 mode, a <BEL>  
character is received and Beep on enabled and the scanner is in RS-  
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is  
<BEL> option is enabled.  
232 mode.  
If after performing these checks the symbol still does not decode,  
contact the distributor or call Wasp Support. See page xvii for the  
telephone number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Technical Specifications  
3-7  
Technical Specifications  
Table 3-2. Technical Specifications  
Description  
Item  
WLS 8400FZ  
WLS 8400ER  
Power Requirements  
Stand-By Current  
Power Source  
4.5 - 14VDC  
50mA (max)  
Depending on host:  
•
•
host powered  
external power supply  
Decode Capability  
UPC/EAN, Bookland EAN, UPC/EAN with supplementals, Code 128, UCC/  
EAN 128, ISBT 128, Code 39, Trioptic Code 39, Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved  
2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar (NW-7), MSI, RSS.  
Beeper Operation  
Beeper Volume  
Beeper Tone  
User-selectable: Enable, Disable  
User-selectable: Three levels  
User-selectable: Three tones  
36 scans/second  
Scan Repetition Rate  
Yaw Tolerance  
Pitch Tolerance  
Roll Tolerance  
± 50° from nominal  
± 65° from nominal  
± 20° from nominal  
± 60° from nominal  
± 65° from nominal  
± 10° from nominal  
Print Contrast Minimum 25% minimum reflectance differential, measured at 650 nm.  
Ambient Light Immunity  
Indoor:  
450 Ft Candles (4,842 Lux)  
450 Ft Candles (4,842 Lux)  
8,000 Ft Candles (86,080 Lux)  
4,000 Ft Candles (43,040 Lux)  
Outdoor:  
Durability  
6.5 ft (2.0 m) drops to concrete  
-22° to 122° F (-30° to 50° C)  
-40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)  
5% to 95% (non-condensing)  
12.35 oz. (350 g)  
Operating Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
Humidity  
Weight (without cable)  
12.56 oz. (356 g)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 3-2. Technical Specifications (Continued)  
Description  
Item  
Dimensions:  
WLS 8400FZ  
WLS 8400ER  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
7.34 in. (18.65 cm)  
4.82 in. (12.25 cm)  
2.93 in. (7.43 cm)  
Laser  
650nm laser diode  
IEC 825-1 Class 2  
Laser Classifications  
ESD  
20 kV area discharge  
8 kV contact discharge  
Minimum Element Width 5 mil (0.127 mm)  
7.5 mil (0.191 mm)  
Interfaces Supported  
Electrical Safety  
Keyboard Wedge, RS-232, USB  
Certified Pending to UL1950, CSA C22.2 No.950. EN60950/IC950  
IEC 1000-4-(2,3,4,5,6,11)  
Input Transient  
Protection  
EMI  
FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B European Union EMC Directive,  
Australian SMA, Taiwan EMC, Japan VCCI/MITI/Dentori  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Technical Specifications  
3-9  
Scanner Signal Descriptions  
Bottom of  
Cable interface port  
PIN 10  
PIN 1  
Interface cable  
modular  
Figure 3-1. Scanner Cable Pinouts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
The signal descriptions in Table 3-3 apply to the connector on the scanner and are for  
reference only.  
Table 3-3. Scanner Signal Pin-outs  
Keyboard  
Pin  
1
RS-232  
Reserved  
Power  
Ground  
TxD  
Wedge  
Reserved  
Power  
USB  
Jump to Pin 6  
Power  
2
3
Ground  
Ground  
4
KeyClock  
TermData  
KeyData  
TermClock  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
D +  
5
RxD  
6
RTS  
Jump to Pin 1  
D -  
7
CTS  
8
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
9
10 Reserved  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
User Preferences  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Scanning Sequence Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
User Preferences Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Set Default Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7  
Laser On Time- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Beep After Good Decode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8  
Aim Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Preferences  
4-3  
Introduction  
The scanner can be programed to perform various functions, or activate different features.  
This chapter describes each user preference feature and provides the programming bar  
codes necessary for selecting these features for the scanner.  
The scanner ships with the settings shown in the User Preferences Default Table on page  
4-4 (also see Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous  
scanner defaults). If the default values suit the requirements, programming may not be  
necessary.  
Feature values are set by scanning single bar codes or short bar code sequences. The  
settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is  
powered down.  
If the USB cable is not being used, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host  
information). After hearing the power-up beeps, select a host type. This only needs to be  
done once, upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.  
To return all features to their default values, scan the Set All Defaults bar code on page 4-  
5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks  
(*).  
*High Frequency  
Feature/Option  
* Indicates Default  
Scanning Sequence Examples  
In most cases, only one bar code needs to be scanned to set a specific parameter value. For  
example, to set the beeper tone to high, simply scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar  
code listed under Beeper Tone on page 4-5. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the  
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.  
Other parameters, such as specifying Laser On Time or setting Data Transmission  
Formats, require that several bar codes be scanned. See Laser On Time on page 4-7 and  
Scan Data Transmission Format on page 9-7 for descriptions of this procedure.  
Errors While Scanning  
Unless otherwise specified, if an error is made during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the  
correct parameter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
User Preferences Default Parameters  
Table 4-1 lists the defaults for user preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the  
appropriate bar code(s) provided in the User Preferences section beginning on page 4-5.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 4-1. User Preferences Default Table  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
User Preferences  
Set Default Parameter  
Beeper Tone  
All Defaults  
4-5  
High  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-7  
4-8  
4-8  
4-10  
Beeper Volume  
Power Mode  
High  
Continuous On  
3.0 sec  
Enable  
Level  
Laser On Time  
Beep After Good Decode  
Trigger Mode  
Aim Duration  
0.0 sec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
User Preferences  
4-5  
User Preferences  
Set Default Parameter  
Scanning this bar code returns all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on  
page A-3.  
Set All Defaults  
Beeper Tone  
To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency,  
or High Frequency bar code.  
Low Frequency  
Medium Frequency  
*High Frequency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Beeper Volume  
To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar  
code.  
Low Volume  
Medium Volume  
*High Volume  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Preferences  
4-7  
Power Mode  
This parameter determines whether or not the scanner enters reduced power mode after a  
decode attempt. When in reduced power mode, the scanner draws less current from its  
power source.  
*Continuous On  
Reduced Power Mode  
Laser On Time  
This parameter sets the maximum time that decode processing continues during a scan  
attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default  
Laser On Time is 3.0 seconds.  
To set a Laser On Time, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on  
time. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. For example, to set a Laser On Time  
of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the “0” and “5” bar codes. In case of an  
error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Laser On Time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Beep After Good Decode  
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode. If Do  
Not Beep After Good Decode is selected, the beeper still operates during parameter menu  
scanning and indicates error conditions.  
*Beep After Good Decode  
(Enable)  
Do Not Beep After Good Decode  
(Disable)  
Trigger Mode  
The scanner has three trigger modes that can be used to scan bar codes. The desired trigger  
mode can be set by using the bar codes below.  
Level Trigger  
When the trigger is pulled, an aiming dot appears for a programmable duration of time.  
After this time, the aiming dot automatically turns into a standard laser scanning beam for  
a full decode session. The laser scanning beam stays on until the laser-on timeout occurs, a  
decode occurs, or the trigger is released. If the trigger is released before the aiming duration  
expires, the laser shuts off and no decode occurs.  
*Level  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
User Preferences  
4-9  
Trigger Mode (continued)  
Two Stage - Option 1  
When the trigger is pulled, an aiming dot appears. This aiming dot remains while the trigger  
is pulled. When the trigger is released, the aiming dot automatically turns into a standard  
laser scanning beam for a full decode session. The laser scanning beam stays on until the  
laser-on timeout occurs or a decode occurs. If the trigger is pulled again while in a decode  
session, the scanner beam returns to an aiming dot.  
Two Stage - Option 1  
Two Stage - Option 2  
When the trigger is pulled, an aiming dot appears. When the trigger is released, the aiming  
dot turns off. Pulling the trigger twice in rapid succession turns on the standard laser  
scanning beam for a full decode session. The laser scanning beam, stays on until the laser-  
on timeout occurs, a decode occurs, or the trigger is released.  
Two Stage - Option 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Aim Duration  
When the scanner is in Level trigger mode (default mode), Aim Duration sets the amount  
of time the aiming dot is seen before turning into a scanning beam. This parameter has no  
affect when the scanner is in either of the Two Stage trigger modes. See Trigger Mode on  
page 4-8 for a description of each of the trigger modes.  
The aim duration is programmable in 0.1 second increments, from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The  
default Aim Duration is 0.0 seconds. When set to 0.0 seconds, no aiming pattern appears  
before a decode session.  
To set an aim duration, scan the bar code below. Then scan two numeric bar codes,  
available in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes, that correspond to the desired aim duration.  
Durations less than 1.0 seconds must have a leading zero. For example, to set an aim  
duration of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, followed by the ‘0’ and the ‘5’ bar codes.  
In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan the ‘Cancel’ bar code on page D-7.  
Aim Duration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Keyboard Wedge Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6  
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Keystroke Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Intra-Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Caps Lock On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Caps Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
FN1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
ASCII Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-3  
Introduction  
This chapter provides Keyboard Wedge interface information for setting up the scanner.  
This interface type is used to attach the scanner between the keyboard and host computer.  
The scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes. The host computer accepts the  
keystrokes as if they originate from the keyboard.  
This mode of operation allows adding bar code reading functionality to a system designed  
for manual keyboard input. In this mode, the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed  
through.  
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks  
(*).  
*North American  
Feature/Option  
* Indicates Default  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface  
Male DIN Host  
Y-cable  
Keyboard  
Female DIN Keyboard  
Figure 5-1. Keyboard Wedge Interface Connection with Y-cable  
To connect the keyboard wedge interface Y-cable:  
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors  
illustrated in Figure 5-1 are examples only. The connectors may be  
different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner  
remain the same.  
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.  
2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the  
scanner. (See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-5.)  
3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on  
the host.  
4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard  
connector.  
5. If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the  
Y-cable.  
6. Ensure that all connections are secure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-5  
7. Turn on the host system.  
8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from  
the Keyboard Wedge Host Types section on page 5-7.  
9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this  
chapter.  
Keyboard Wedge Default Parameters  
Table 5-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option,  
scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section  
beginning on page 5-7.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 5-1. Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table  
Parameter  
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters  
Keyboard Wedge Host Type  
Default  
Page Number  
IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles 5-7  
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country  
Codes)  
North American  
5-8  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Keystroke Delay  
Enable  
5-10  
5-10  
5-11  
5-12  
5-12  
5-13  
5-14  
5-15  
0 msec (No Delay)  
Disable  
Intra-Keystroke Delay  
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation  
Caps Lock On  
Disable  
Disable  
Caps Lock Override  
Disable  
Convert Wedge Data  
Do Not Convert Wedge Data  
Disable  
Function Key Mapping  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-1. Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
5-15  
FN1 Substitution  
Send Make and Break  
Disable  
Send Make and Break Scan Codes  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-7  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types  
Keyboard Wedge Host Types  
Select the keyboard wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below.  
*IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles  
IBM PS/2 (Model 30)  
IBM AT NOTEBOOK  
IBM XT  
NCR 7052  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes)  
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If the particular keyboard type is not  
listed, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 5-12.  
*North American  
German Windows  
French Windows  
French Canadian Windows 95/98  
French Canadian Windows XP/2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-9  
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) (continued)  
Spanish Windows  
Italian Windows  
Swedish Windows  
UK English Windows  
Japanese Windows  
Brazilian-Portuguese Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes  
With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown  
characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With  
Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character  
and then an error beep sounds on the scanner.  
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters  
(Enable)  
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters  
(Disable)  
Keystroke Delay  
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to  
increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.  
*0 msec (No Delay)  
20 msec (Medium Delay)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-11  
Keystroke Delay (continued)  
40 msec (Long Delay)  
Intra-Keystroke Delay  
When enabled, an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and  
release. This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec, as well.  
Enable Intra-Keystroke Delay  
*Disable Intra-Keystroke Delay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation  
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge  
Country Types (Country Codes) on page 5-8 in a Microsoft® operating system  
environment.  
Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad  
*Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad  
Caps Lock On  
When enabled, the scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed.  
Enable Caps Lock On  
*Disable Caps Lock On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-13  
Caps Lock Override  
When enabled, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps  
Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the bar code is sent as an ‘A’ no matter what the state of the  
keyboard’s Caps Lock key.  
Enable Caps Lock Override  
*Disable Caps Lock Override  
If both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps  
Lock Override takes precedence.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Convert Wedge Data  
When enabled, the scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.  
Convert Wedge Data to Upper Case  
Convert Wedge Data to Lower Case  
*Do Not Convert Wedge Data  
Function Key Mapping  
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 5-2 on page  
5-19). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key  
mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this  
parameter is enabled.  
Enable Function Key Mapping  
*Disable Function Key Mapping  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-15  
FN1 Substitution  
When enabled, this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar  
code with a keystroke chosen by the user. (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 9-9).  
Enable FN1 Substitution  
*Disable FN1 Substitution  
Send Make and Break  
When enabled, the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent.  
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes  
Send Make Scan Code Only  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Maps  
The following keyboard maps are provided for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To  
program the prefix/suffix values, see the bar codes on page 9-6.  
7006  
7001  
7014  
5001  
5002  
5003  
5004  
5005  
5006  
5007 5008  
5009  
5010  
5012  
7010  
7007  
5011  
7003  
7005  
7011  
7002  
7012  
7004  
7008  
7009  
7013  
7015  
7016  
7017  
7018  
Figure 5-2. IBM PS2 Type Keyboard  
5001  
5003  
5005  
5007  
5009  
7014  
7008  
5002  
7009  
7012  
7004  
7003  
7006  
5004  
5006  
5008  
5010  
7013  
7011  
7002  
Figure 5-3. IBM PC/XT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-17  
5001  
5003  
5005  
5007  
5009  
7008  
7013  
7014  
7012  
5002  
5004  
5006  
5008  
5010  
7009  
7003  
7004  
7011  
7002  
Figure 5-4. IBM PC/AT  
5002  
1045 5013  
5001  
5003  
5005  
5007  
5011  
5014 5015  
1043 5016  
5004  
5006  
5018  
5019  
5008  
5010  
5017  
7013  
5009  
5012  
(1048 if double key)  
1046  
1048  
(7013 if double key)  
Figure 5-5. NCR 7052 32-KEY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
1068  
1075  
1082  
1067  
1066  
1070  
1071  
1065  
1072  
1079  
1069  
1076  
1083  
1074  
1081  
1073  
1080  
1077  
1084  
1078  
1085  
5002  
1045 5013  
1086  
5001  
5003  
5005  
5007  
5011  
5014 5015  
1043 5016  
1087  
1088  
1089  
5004  
5006  
5018  
5019  
5008  
5010  
5017  
7013  
1090  
5009  
5012  
(1048 if double key)  
1046  
1048  
(1043 if double key)  
Figure 5-6. NCR 7052 58-KEY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-19  
ASCII Character Set  
Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character  
($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII  
character value to the pair. For example, when Code 39 Full ASCII is  
enabled and a +B is scanned, it is interpreted as b, %J as ?, and %V  
as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
CTRL A  
1001  
1002  
1003  
1004  
1005  
1006  
1007  
1008  
$A  
$B  
$C  
$D  
$E  
$F  
CTRL B  
CTRL C  
CTRL D  
CTRL E  
CTRL F  
CTRL G  
$G  
$H  
CTRL H/  
BACKSPACE  
1
1009  
$I  
CTRL I/  
HORIZONTAL TAB  
1
1010  
1011  
1012  
1013  
1014  
1015  
1016  
$J  
CTRL J  
$K  
$L  
$M  
$N  
$O  
$P  
CTRL K  
CTRL L  
1
CTRL M/ENTER  
CTRL N  
CTRL O  
CTRL P  
CTRL Q  
1017  
$Q  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5-20 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
CTRL R  
1018  
1019  
1020  
1021  
1022  
1023  
1024  
1025  
1026  
1027  
1028  
1029  
1030  
1031  
1032  
1033  
1034  
1035  
1036  
1037  
1038  
1039  
1040  
$R  
$S  
CTRL S  
$T  
$U  
$V  
$W  
$X  
$Y  
$Z  
%A  
%B  
%C  
%D  
%E  
Space  
/A  
CTRL T  
CTRL U  
CTRL V  
CTRL W  
CTRL X  
CTRL Y  
CTRL Z  
1
CTRL [ /ESC  
CTRL \  
CTRL ]  
CTRL 6  
CTRL -  
Space  
!
/B  
“
#
$
%
&
‘
/C  
/D  
/E  
/F  
/G  
/H  
(
1041  
/I  
)
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-21  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
1042  
1043  
1044  
1045  
1046  
1047  
1048  
1049  
1050  
1051  
1052  
1053  
1054  
1055  
1056  
1057  
1058  
1059  
1060  
1061  
1062  
1063  
1064  
/J  
/K  
/L  
-
*
+
,
-
.
.
/O  
0
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Z  
%F  
%G  
%H  
%I  
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
%J  
%V  
A
1065  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-22 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
1066  
1067  
1068  
1069  
1070  
1071  
1072  
1073  
1074  
1075  
1076  
1077  
1078  
1079  
1080  
1081  
1082  
1083  
1084  
1085  
1086  
1087  
1088  
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
G
H
I
J
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
T
U
V
W
X
Y
1089  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-23  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
1090  
1091  
1092  
1093  
1094  
1095  
1096  
1097  
1098  
1099  
1100  
1101  
1102  
1103  
1104  
1105  
1106  
1107  
1108  
1109  
1110  
1111  
1112  
Z
Z
[
%K  
%L  
%M  
%N  
%O  
%W  
+A  
+B  
+C  
+D  
+E  
\
]
^
_
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
+F  
+G  
+H  
+I  
g
h
i
+J  
j
+K  
+L  
k
l
+M  
+N  
+O  
+P  
m
n
o
p
q
1113  
+Q  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-24 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
ASCII Value  
Encode Character  
Keystroke  
1114  
1115  
1116  
1117  
1118  
1119  
1120  
1121  
1122  
1123  
1124  
1125  
+R  
r
+S  
s
+T  
t
+U  
+V  
+W  
+X  
+Y  
+Z  
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
%P  
%Q  
%R  
%S  
}
~
1126  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-25  
Table 5-3. Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set  
ALT Keys  
Keystroke  
2065  
2066  
2067  
2068  
2069  
2070  
2071  
2072  
2073  
2074  
2075  
2076  
2077  
2078  
2079  
2080  
2081  
2082  
2083  
2084  
2085  
2086  
2087  
2088  
2089  
2090  
ALT A  
ALT B  
ALT C  
ALT D  
ALT E  
ALT F  
ALT G  
ALT H  
ALT I  
ALT J  
ALT K  
ALT L  
ALT M  
ALT N  
ALT O  
ALT P  
ALT Q  
ALT R  
ALT S  
ALT T  
ALT U  
ALT V  
ALT W  
ALT X  
ALT Y  
ALT Z  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-26 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set  
GUI Keys  
Keystrokes  
Right Control Key  
3000  
3048  
3049  
3050  
3051  
3052  
3053  
3054  
3055  
3056  
3057  
3065  
3066  
3067  
3068  
3069  
3070  
3071  
3072  
3073  
3074  
3075  
3076  
3077  
3078  
3079  
3080  
GUI 0  
GUI 1  
GUI 2  
GUI 3  
GUI 4  
GUI 5  
GUI 6  
GUI 7  
GUI 8  
GUI 9  
GUI A  
GUI B  
GUI C  
GUI D  
GUI E  
GUI F  
GUI G  
GUI H  
GUI I  
GUI J  
GUI K  
GUI L  
GUI M  
GUI N  
GUI O  
GUI P  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-27  
Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GUI Key Character Set (Continued)  
GUI Keys  
Keystrokes  
3081  
3082  
3083  
3084  
3085  
3086  
3087  
3088  
3089  
3090  
GUI Q  
GUI R  
GUI S  
GUI T  
GUI U  
GUI V  
GUI W  
GUI X  
GUI Y  
GUI Z  
Table 5-5. Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set  
F Keys  
Keystroke  
5001  
5002  
5003  
5004  
5005  
5006  
5007  
5008  
5009  
5010  
5011  
5012  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-28 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-5. Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set (Continued)  
F Keys  
Keystroke  
5013  
5014  
5015  
5016  
5017  
5018  
5019  
5020  
5021  
5022  
5023  
5024  
F13  
F14  
F15  
F16  
F17  
F18  
F19  
F20  
F21  
F22  
F23  
F24  
Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set  
Numeric Keypad  
Keystroke  
6042  
6043  
6044  
6045  
6046  
6047  
6048  
6049  
6050  
6051  
*
+
undefined  
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Wedge Interface  
5-29  
Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)  
Numeric Keypad  
Keystroke  
6052  
6053  
6054  
6055  
6056  
6057  
6058  
6059  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Enter  
Num Lock  
Table 5-7. Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set  
Extended Keypad  
Keystroke  
7001  
7002  
7003  
7004  
7005  
7006  
7007  
7008  
7009  
7010  
7011  
7012  
7013  
7014  
Break  
Delete  
Pg Up  
End  
Pg Dn  
Pause  
Scroll Lock  
Backspace  
Tab  
Print Screen  
Insert  
Home  
Enter  
Escape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-30 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 5-7. Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set (Continued)  
Extended Keypad  
Keystroke  
7015  
7016  
7017  
7018  
Up Arrow  
Dn Arrow  
Left Arrow  
Right Arrow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
RS-232 Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Connecting an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
RS-232 Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6  
RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Check Receive Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13  
Data Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Software Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19  
RTS Line State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  
Beep on <BEL> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
Intercharacter Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Nixdorf Mode A/B and OPOS/JPOS Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24  
ASCII / Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232 Interface  
6-3  
Introduction  
This chapter provides RS-232 host information for setting up the scanner. The RS-232  
interface is used to attach the scanner to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other  
devices with an available RS-232 port (i.e., com port).  
If the particular host is not listed in Table 6-2, set the communication parameters to match  
the host device. To set communication parameters for hosts not listed, refer to the  
documentation for the host device.  
This scanner utilizes TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interfaces with  
most system architectures. Please contact Wasp Support for more  
information.  
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks  
(*).  
*Baud Rate 9600  
Feature/Option  
* Indicates Default  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Connecting an RS-232 Interface  
This connection is made directly from the scanner to the host computer.  
Serial Port Connector to  
Interface  
Power supply  
Figure 6-1. RS-232 Direct Connection  
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors  
illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples only. The connectors may be  
different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner  
remain the same.  
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface  
port on the scanner. (See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-5.)  
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.  
3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable.  
Plug the power supply to an appropriate outlet.  
4. Ensure that all connections are secure.  
5. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from the RS-232  
Host Types section on page 6-9.  
6. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this  
chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-5  
RS-232 Default Parameters  
Table 6-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. To change any option, scan the  
appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page  
6-6.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 6-1. RS-232 Host Default Table  
Parameter  
RS-232 Host Parameters  
Default  
Page Number  
RS-232 Host Types  
Baud Rate  
Standard RS-232  
9600  
6-9  
6-11  
6-13  
6-13  
6-14  
6-14  
6-16  
6-18  
6-20  
6-21  
6-22  
6-23  
6-24  
6-25  
Parity  
None  
Check Receive Errors  
Stop Bit Select  
Enable  
1 Stop Bit  
8-Bit  
Data Bits  
Hardware Handshaking  
Software Handshaking  
Host Serial Response Time-out  
RTS Line State  
None  
None  
Minimum: 2 sec  
Host: Low RTS  
Disable  
Beep on <BEL>  
Intercharacter Delay  
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Minimum: 0 msec  
Normal Operation  
Send Bar Code  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
RS-232 Host Parameters  
Various RS-232 host types are set up with their own parameter default settings. Selecting  
the host type sets the parameter defaults as listed in Table 6-2.  
Table 6-2. Terminal Specific RS-232  
Standard  
RS-232  
Parameter (Default)  
Wincor- Wincor-  
Nixdorf Nixdorf  
Mode A Mode B  
OPOS/  
JPOS  
ICL  
Yes  
Olivetti  
Yes  
Omron  
Yes  
Fujitsu  
Yes  
Transmit  
Code ID  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Data  
Transmission  
Format  
Data as is  
Data/  
Suffix  
Data/  
Suffix  
Data/  
Suffix  
Prefix/  
Data/  
Suffix  
Data/  
Suffix  
Data/  
Suffix  
Data/  
Suffix  
CR/LF  
(7013)  
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX  
(1002)  
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013)  
Suffix  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
9600  
None  
None  
9600  
Even  
9600  
Odd  
9600  
Odd  
9600  
Even  
9600  
None  
None  
9600  
Odd  
9600  
None  
Hardware  
Hand-  
shaking  
RTS/CTS RTS/CTS RTS/CTS None  
RTS/CTS None  
Option 3  
Option 3  
None  
Option 3  
None  
Option 3  
None  
Software  
Hand-  
None  
Ack/Nak None  
None  
None  
shaking  
Serial  
2 Sec.  
9.9 Sec.  
30.0 Sec. 30.0 Sec. 9.9 Sec.  
9.9 Sec.  
30.0 Sec. 2 Sec.  
Response  
Time-out  
Stop Bit  
Select  
One  
One  
One  
One  
One  
One  
One  
One  
ASCII  
Format  
8-Bit  
Disable  
Low  
8-Bit  
Disable  
High  
8-Bit  
Disable  
Low  
8-Bit  
7-Bit  
8-Bit  
Disable  
High  
8-Bit  
8-Bit  
Beep On  
<BEL>  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Low = No Low  
data to  
send  
Low = No Low  
data to  
send  
RTS Line  
State  
None  
None  
None  
None  
STX  
None  
None  
None  
Prefix  
(1003)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-7  
Table 6-2. Terminal Specific RS-232  
Standard  
RS-232  
Wincor- Wincor-  
Nixdorf Nixdorf  
OPOS/  
Parameter (Default)  
ICL  
Mode A Mode B  
Olivetti  
Omron  
JPOS  
Fujitsu  
*In the Nixdorf Mode B or OPOS/JPOS, if CTS is Low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is High, the user can scan  
bar codes.  
**If Nixdorf Mode B or OPOS/JPOS is scanned without the scanner connected to the proper host, it may appear  
unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)  
Selecting the ICL, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, Olivetti, Omron,  
OPOS/JPOS or Fujitsu host type enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in  
Table 6-3 below. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the  
Transmit Code ID feature. The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these  
terminals.  
Table 6-3. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters  
Wincor-  
Nixdorf  
Mode A  
Wincor-  
Nixdorf  
Mode B  
OPOS/  
JPOS  
ICL  
Olivetti  
Omron  
Fujitsu  
UPC-A  
UPC-E  
A
E
A
A
C
B
A
A
C
B
A
A
E
A
C
B
A
A
E
C
B
A
EAN-8/JAN-8 FF  
FF  
F
FF  
F
EAN-13/JAN-  
13  
F
Code 39  
Codabar  
Code 128  
I 2 of 5  
C <len>  
N <len>  
L <len>  
I <len>  
None  
M
M
N
K
I
M <len>  
N <len>  
K <len>  
I <len>  
L <len>  
H <len>  
P <len>  
O <len>  
A
C <len>  
N <len>  
L <len>  
I <len>  
None  
M
N
K
I
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
F
N
K
I
Code 93  
D 2 of 5  
L
L
H
P
L
H
P
H <len>  
H
H <len>  
L <len>  
None  
UCC/EAN 128 L <len>  
P
MSI  
None  
F
O
O
A
O
A
Bookland EAN  
Trioptic  
Code 11  
IATA  
A
F
None  
None  
H<len>  
None  
None  
None  
H
None  
None  
H
None  
None  
None  
None  
H
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Code 32  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RS-232 Interface  
6-9  
RS-232 Host Types  
To select an RS-232 host type, scan one of the following bar codes.  
*Standard RS-232  
ICL RS-232  
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A  
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B  
Olivetti ORS4500  
Omron  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
RS-232 Host Types (continued)  
OPOS/JPOS  
Fujitsu RS-232  
Baud Rate  
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. The scanner's baud rate  
setting should match the baud rate setting of the host device. If not, data may not reach the  
host device or may reach it in distorted form.  
Baud Rate 600  
Baud Rate 1200  
Baud Rate 2400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RS-232 Interface  
6-11  
Baud Rate (continued)  
Baud Rate 4800  
*Baud Rate 9600  
Baud Rate 19,200  
Baud Rate 38,400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Parity  
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the  
parity type according to host device requirements.  
Select Odd parity with the parity bit value set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd  
number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.  
Odd  
Select Even parity with the parity bit value set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an  
even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.  
Even  
Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1.  
Mark  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RS-232 Interface  
6-13  
Parity (continued)  
Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0.  
Space  
Select None when no parity bit is required.  
*None  
Check Receive Errors  
Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked.  
The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected  
above.  
*Check For Received Errors (Enable)  
Do Not Check For Received Errors (Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Stop Bit Select  
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one  
character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream.  
The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal  
is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device  
requirements.  
*1 Stop Bit  
2 Stop Bits  
Data Bits  
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII  
protocol.  
7-Bit  
*8-Bit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
RS-232 Interface  
6-15  
Hardware Handshaking  
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the  
hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS).  
If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes  
available. If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, scan data is transmitted according  
to the following sequence:  
•
The scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is de-asserted, the scanner waits  
up to the Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If,  
after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS line is still asserted, the  
scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost.  
•
When the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to  
the Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts  
CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the CTS  
line is still de-asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data.  
•
•
When data transmission is complete, the scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after  
sending the last character.  
The host should respond by de-asserting CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted  
CTS upon the next transmission of data.  
During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is de-asserted for  
more than 50 ms between characters, the transmission is aborted, the scanner sounds a  
transmission error, and the data is discarded.  
If the above communications sequence fails, the scanner issues an error indication. In this  
case, the data is lost and must be rescanned.  
If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware  
Handshaking takes precedence.  
The DTR signal is jumped to the active state.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Hardware Handshaking (continued)  
None  
Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired.  
*None  
Standard RTS/CTS  
Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.  
Standard RTS/CTS  
RTS/CTS Option 1  
When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and  
ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete.  
RTS/CTS Option 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RS-232 Interface  
6-17  
Hardware Handshaking (continued)  
RTS/CTS Option 2  
When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level).  
However, the scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not  
asserted within Host Serial Response Time-out (default), the scanner issues an error  
indication and discards the data.  
RTS/CTS Option 2  
RTS/CTS Option 3  
When Option 3 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission,  
regardless of the state of CTS. The scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out  
(default) for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the scanner issues  
an error indication and discards the data. The scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is  
complete.  
RTS/CTS Option 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Software Handshaking  
This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of,  
that offered by hardware handshaking. There are five options.  
If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware  
Handshaking takes precedence.  
None  
When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from  
host.  
*None  
ACK/NAK  
When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or  
NAK response from the host. When a NAK is received, the scanner transmits the same data  
again and waits for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data  
when NAKs are received, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data.  
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an  
ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication  
and discards the data. There are no retries when a time-out occurs.  
ACK/NAK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-19  
Software Handshaking (continued)  
ENQ  
When this option is selected, the scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before  
transmitting data. If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the  
scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ  
character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors.  
ENQ  
ACK/NAK with ENQ  
This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from  
the host, an additional ENQ is not required.  
ACK/NAK with ENQ  
XON/XOFF  
An XOFF character turns the scanner transmission off until the scanner receives an XON  
character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:  
•
XOFF is received before the scanner has data to send. When the scanner has data  
to send, it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before  
transmission. If the XON is not received within this time, the scanner issues an  
error indication and discards the data.  
•
XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending  
the current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of  
the data message. The scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON.  
XON/XOFF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Host Serial Response Time-out  
This parameter specifies how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before  
determining that a transmission error has occurred. This only applies when in one of the  
ACK/NAK Software Handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking option.  
This parameter does not apply to the Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode  
A/B and the OPOS/JPOS host types.  
*Minimum: 2 sec  
Low: 2.5 Sec  
Medium: 5 Sec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-21  
Host Serial Response Time-out (continued)  
High: 7.5 Sec  
Maximum: 9.9 Sec  
RTS Line State  
This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to  
select Low RTS or High RTS line state.  
*Host: Low RTS  
Host: High RTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6-22 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Beep on <BEL>  
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is  
detected on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal  
entry or other important event.  
Beep On <BEL> Character  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-23  
Intercharacter Delay  
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.  
*Minimum: 0 msec  
Low: 25 msec  
Medium: 50 msec  
High: 75 msec  
Maximum: 99 msec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6-24 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Nixdorf Mode A/B and OPOS/JPOS Beep/LED Options  
When Nixdorf Mode A, Nixdorf Mode B or OPOS/JPOS is selected, this parameter  
indicates when the scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode.  
The Beep/LED After CTS Pulse option is not valid when Nixdorf  
Mode A is selected.  
*Normal Operation  
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)  
Beep/LED After Transmission  
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
RS-232 Interface  
6-25  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with  
Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is send except for unknown characters,  
and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown  
Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an  
error beep sounds on the scanner.  
*Send Bar Code  
(with unknown characters)  
Do Not Send Bar Codes  
(with unknown characters)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6-26 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
ASCII / Character Set  
The values in Table 6-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data  
transmission.  
Table 6-4. RS-232 Prefix/Suffix Values  
Full ASCII Code 39  
Prefix/Suffix Value  
1000  
Encode Character  
ASCII Character  
NUL  
%U  
$A  
$B  
$C  
$D  
$E  
$F  
1001  
SOH  
1002  
STX  
1003  
ETX  
1004  
EOT  
1005  
ENQ  
1006  
ACK  
1007  
$G  
$H  
$I  
BELL  
BCKSPC  
HORIZ TAB  
LF/NW LN  
VT  
1008  
1009  
1010  
$J  
1011  
$K  
$L  
$M  
$N  
$O  
$P  
1012  
FF  
1013  
CR/ENTER  
SO  
1014  
1015  
SI  
1016  
DLE  
1017  
$Q  
$R  
$S  
DC1/XON  
DC2  
1018  
1019  
DC3/XOFF  
DC4  
1020  
$T  
$U  
$V  
$W  
1021  
NAK  
1022  
SYN  
1023  
ETB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Interface  
6-27  
Table 6-4. RS-232 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII Code 39  
Prefix/Suffix Value  
1024  
Encode Character  
ASCII Character  
$X  
$Y  
$Z  
%A  
%B  
%C  
%D  
%E  
Space  
/A  
/B  
/C  
/D  
/E  
CAN  
1025  
EM  
1026  
SUB  
1027  
ESC  
1028  
FS  
1029  
GS  
1030  
RS  
1031  
US  
1032  
Space  
1033  
!
"
1034  
1035  
#
$
%
&
‘
1036  
1037  
1038  
/F  
1039  
/G  
/H  
/I  
1040  
(
1041  
)
1042  
/J  
*
+
,
1043  
/K  
/L  
1044  
1045  
-
-
1046  
.
.
1047  
/O  
0
/
1048  
0
1
2
1049  
1
1050  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-28 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 6-4. RS-232 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII Code 39  
Encode Character  
Prefix/Suffix Value  
1051  
ASCII Character  
3
4
3
4
1052  
1053  
5
5
1054  
6
6
1057  
7
7
1056  
8
8
1057  
9
9
1058  
/Z  
%F  
%G  
%H  
%I  
%J  
%V  
A
:
1059  
;
1060  
<
=
>
?
1061  
1062  
1063  
1064  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
1065  
1066  
B
1067  
C
1068  
D
1069  
E
1070  
F
1071  
G
1072  
H
1073  
I
1074  
J
J
1075  
K
K
L
M
1076  
L
1077  
M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232 Interface  
6-29  
Table 6-4. RS-232 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII Code 39  
Prefix/Suffix Value  
1078  
Encode Character  
ASCII Character  
N
O
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
1079  
1080  
P
1081  
Q
1082  
R
1083  
S
1084  
T
1085  
U
1086  
V
1087  
W
1088  
X
1089  
Y
1090  
Z
1091  
%K  
%L  
%M  
%N  
%O  
%W  
+A  
+B  
+C  
+D  
+E  
+F  
+G  
+H  
1092  
\
1093  
]
1094  
^
1095  
_
1096  
`
1097  
a
1098  
b
1099  
c
1100  
d
1101  
e
1102  
f
1103  
g
1104  
h
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-30 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 6-4. RS-232 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII Code 39  
Encode Character  
Prefix/Suffix Value  
1105  
ASCII Character  
+I  
+J  
i
1106  
j
1107  
+K  
+L  
+M  
+N  
+O  
+P  
k
1108  
l
1109  
m
1110  
n
1111  
o
1112  
p
1113  
+Q  
+R  
+S  
q
1114  
r
1115  
s
1116  
+T  
+U  
+V  
+W  
+X  
+Y  
+Z  
%P  
%Q  
%R  
%S  
t
1117  
u
1118  
v
1119  
w
1120  
x
1121  
y
1122  
z
1123  
{
1124  
|
1125  
}
~
1126  
1127  
Undefined  
ENTER  
7013  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
USB Interface  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
USB Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6  
USB Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
USB Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Emulate Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Convert Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
ASCII Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-3  
Introduction  
This chapter provides the connection and setup of the scanner to a USB host. The scanner  
attaches directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, and is powered by it. No additional  
power supply is required.  
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks  
(*).  
* Indicates Default  
*North American Standard USB Keyboard  
Feature/Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Connecting a USB Interface  
USB Series A  
Interface  
Figure 7-1. USB Connection  
The scanner connects with USB capable hosts including:  
•
•
Desktop PCs and notebooks  
Apple™ iMacs, Power Mac G4s and G5s, iBooks (North America only),  
PowerBooks  
•
•
IBM SurePOS terminals  
Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.  
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:  
•
•
•
Windows® 98, 2000, ME, XP  
Mac OS 8.5 and above  
IBM 4690 OS.  
The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface  
Devices (HID).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
USB Interface  
7-5  
To set up the scanner:  
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors  
illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples only. The connectors may be  
different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner  
remain the same.  
1. Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port  
on the scanner. (See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-5.)  
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power  
connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal.  
3. Ensure that all connections are secure.  
4. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from the USB  
Device Type section on page 7-7.  
5. On first installation when using Windows, the software displays a prompt to select  
or install the "Human Interface Device" driver. To install the "Human Interface  
Device" driver provided by Windows click "Next" through all the choices and click  
"Finished" on the last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation.  
6. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this  
chapter.  
If there are any problems with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
USB Default Parameters  
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. To change any option, scan the  
appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page  
7-7.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 7-1. USB Host Default Table  
Parameter  
USB Host Parameters  
Default  
Page Number  
USB Device Type  
HID Keyboard Emulation  
North American  
No Delay (0 msec)  
Disable  
7-7  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)  
USB Keystroke Delay  
7-8  
7-10  
7-11  
7-12  
7-13  
7-14  
7-14  
7-15  
7-15  
USB CAPS Lock Override  
USB Ignore Unknown Characters  
Emulate Keypad  
Enable  
Disable  
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution  
Function Key Mapping  
Disable  
Disable  
Simulated Caps Lock  
Disable  
Convert Case  
No Case Conversion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
USB Interface  
7-7  
USB Host Parameters  
USB Device Type  
Select the desired USB device type.  
When changing USB Device Types, the scanner automatically resets.  
The scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences.  
*HID Keyboard Emulation  
IBM Table Top USB  
IBM Hand-Held USB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)  
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB  
HID Keyboard Emulation device.  
When changing USB Country Keyboard Types, the scanner  
automatically resets. The scanner issues the standard startup beep  
sequences.  
*North American Standard USB Keyboard  
German Windows  
French Windows  
French Canadian Windows 95/98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
USB Interface  
7-9  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) (continued)  
French Canadian Windows 2000/XP  
Spanish Windows  
Italian Windows  
Swedish Windows  
UK English Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) (continued)  
Japanese Windows (ASCII)  
Brazilian-Portuguese Windows  
USB Keystroke Delay  
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar  
code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.  
*No Delay (0 msec)  
Medium Delay (20 msec)  
Long Delay (40 msec)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
USB Interface  
7-11  
USB CAPS Lock Override  
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case  
of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always  
enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)” keyboard type and can not be disabled.  
Override Caps Lock Key  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
USB Ignore Unknown Characters  
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown  
characters are characters the host does not recognize. When “Send Bar Codes With  
Unknown Characters” is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters,  
and no error beeps sound. When “Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters” is  
selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and  
an error beep sounds.  
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters  
(Enable)  
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
USB Interface  
7-13  
Emulate Keypad  
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For  
example ASCII A would be sent as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.  
*Disable Keypad Emulation  
Enable Keypad Emulation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution  
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this  
allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category  
and value chosen by the user. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 9-9 to set the Key  
Category and Key Value.  
Enable USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution  
*Disable USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution  
Function Key Mapping  
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 7-2 on page  
7-16). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key  
mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this  
parameter is enabled.  
*Disable Function Key Mapping  
Enable Function Key Mapping  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
USB Interface  
7-15  
Simulated Caps Lock  
When enabled, the scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the scanner bar code  
as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of  
the current state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.  
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock  
Enable Simulated Caps Lock  
Convert Case  
When enabled, the scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.  
*No Case Conversion  
Convert All to Upper Case  
Convert All to Lower Case  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
ASCII Character Set  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1000  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
CTRL 2  
%U  
1001  
1002  
1003  
1004  
1005  
1006  
1007  
1008  
$A  
$B  
$C  
$D  
$E  
$F  
CTRL A  
CTRL B  
CTRL C  
CTRL D  
CTRL E  
CTRL F  
CTRL G  
$G  
$H  
CTRL H/  
BACKSPACE  
1
1009  
$I  
CTRL I/  
HORIZONTAL TAB  
1
1010  
1011  
1012  
1013  
1014  
1015  
1016  
1017  
1018  
1019  
$J  
CTRL J  
$K  
$L  
$M  
$N  
$O  
$P  
$Q  
$R  
$S  
$T  
CTRL K  
CTRL L  
1
CTRL M/ENTER  
CTRL N  
CTRL O  
CTRL P  
CTRL Q  
CTRL R  
CTRL S  
CTRL T  
1020  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USB Interface  
7-17  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1021  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
CTRL U  
$U  
1022  
1023  
1024  
1025  
1026  
1027  
1028  
1029  
1030  
1031  
1032  
1033  
1034  
1035  
1036  
1037  
1038  
1039  
1040  
1041  
1042  
1043  
$V  
$W  
$X  
$Y  
$Z  
%A  
%B  
%C  
%D  
%E  
Space  
/A  
CTRL V  
CTRL W  
CTRL X  
CTRL Y  
CTRL Z  
1
CTRL [/ESC  
CTRL \  
CTRL ]  
CTRL 6  
CTRL -  
Space  
!
/B  
“
#
$
%
&
‘
/C  
/D  
/E  
/F  
/G  
/H  
(
/I  
)
/J  
*
+
,
/K  
1044  
/L  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-18 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1045  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
-
-
1046  
1047  
1048  
1049  
1050  
1051  
1052  
1053  
1054  
1055  
1056  
1057  
1058  
1059  
1060  
1061  
1062  
1063  
1064  
1065  
1066  
1067  
.
.
/O  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Z  
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
%F  
%G  
%H  
%I  
%J  
%V  
A
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
B
C
1068  
D
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-19  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1069  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
E
F
E
F
1070  
1071  
1072  
1073  
1074  
1075  
1076  
1077  
1078  
1079  
1080  
1081  
1082  
1083  
1084  
1085  
1086  
1087  
1088  
1089  
1090  
1091  
G
H
I
G
H
I
J
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
%K  
%L  
1092  
\
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-20 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1093  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
%M  
]
1094  
1095  
1096  
1097  
1098  
1099  
1100  
1101  
1102  
1103  
1104  
1105  
1106  
1107  
1108  
1109  
1110  
1111  
1112  
1113  
1114  
1115  
%N  
%O  
%W  
+A  
+B  
+C  
+D  
+E  
+F  
^
_
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
+G  
+H  
+I  
g
h
i
+J  
j
+K  
+L  
+M  
+N  
+O  
+P  
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
+Q  
+R  
+S  
s
1116  
+T  
t
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-21  
Table 7-2. USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)  
Full ASCII  
Code 39  
Prefix/ Suffix Value  
1117  
Encode Char.acter  
Keystroke  
+U  
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
1118  
1119  
1120  
1121  
1122  
1123  
1124  
1125  
+V  
+W  
+X  
+Y  
+Z  
%P  
%Q  
%R  
%S  
}
~
1126  
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled.  
Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.  
Table 7-3. USB ALT Key Character Set  
ALT Keys  
Keystroke  
2064  
2065  
2066  
2067  
2068  
2069  
2070  
2071  
2072  
ALT 2  
ALT A  
ALT B  
ALT C  
ALT D  
ALT E  
ALT F  
ALT G  
ALT H  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-22 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 7-3. USB ALT Key Character Set (Continued)  
ALT Keys  
Keystroke  
2073  
2074  
2075  
2076  
2077  
2078  
2079  
2080  
2081  
2082  
2083  
2084  
2085  
2086  
2087  
2088  
2089  
2090  
ALT I  
ALT J  
ALT K  
ALT L  
ALT M  
ALT N  
ALT O  
ALT P  
ALT Q  
ALT R  
ALT S  
ALT T  
ALT U  
ALT V  
ALT W  
ALT X  
ALT Y  
ALT Z  
Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set  
GUI Key  
Keystroke  
Right Control Key  
GUI 0  
3000  
3048  
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of  
the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key,  
and to the right of the right ALT key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-23  
Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)  
GUI Key  
Keystroke  
3049  
3050  
3051  
3052  
3053  
3054  
3055  
3056  
3057  
3065  
3066  
3067  
3068  
3069  
3070  
3071  
3072  
3073  
3074  
3075  
3076  
3077  
3078  
3079  
GUI 1  
GUI 2  
GUI 3  
GUI 4  
GUI 5  
GUI 6  
GUI 7  
GUI 8  
GUI 9  
GUI A  
GUI B  
GUI C  
GUI D  
GUI E  
GUI F  
GUI G  
GUI H  
GUI I  
GUI J  
GUI K  
GUI L  
GUI M  
GUI N  
GUI O  
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of  
the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key,  
and to the right of the right ALT key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-24 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)  
GUI Key  
Keystroke  
3080  
3081  
3082  
3083  
3084  
3085  
3086  
3087  
3088  
3089  
3090  
GUI P  
GUI Q  
GUI R  
GUI S  
GUI T  
GUI U  
GUI V  
GUI W  
GUI X  
GUI Y  
GUI Z  
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of  
the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key,  
and to the right of the right ALT key.  
Table 7-5. USB F Key Character Set  
F Keys  
Keystroke  
5001  
5002  
5003  
5004  
5005  
5006  
5007  
5008  
5009  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-25  
Table 7-5. USB F Key Character Set (Continued)  
F Keys  
Keystroke  
5010  
5011  
5012  
5013  
5014  
5015  
5016  
5017  
5018  
5019  
5020  
5021  
5022  
5023  
5024  
F10  
F11  
F 12  
F 13  
F 14  
F 15  
F16  
F 17  
F 18  
F 19  
F 20  
F 21  
F 22  
F 23  
F 24  
Table 7-6. USB Numeric Keypad Character Set  
Numeric Keypad  
Keystroke  
6042  
6043  
6044  
6045  
6046  
6047  
6048  
*
+
undefined  
-
.
/
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-26 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 7-6. USB Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)  
Numeric Keypad  
Keystroke  
6049  
6050  
6051  
6052  
6053  
6054  
6055  
6056  
6057  
6058  
6059  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Enter  
Num Lock  
Table 7-7. USB Extended Keypad Character Set  
Extended Keypad  
Keystroke  
7001  
7002  
7003  
7004  
7005  
7006  
7007  
7008  
7009  
7010  
7011  
Break  
Delete  
PgUp  
End  
Pg Dn  
Pause  
Scroll Lock  
Backspace  
Tab  
Print Screen  
Insert  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Interface  
7-27  
Table 7-7. USB Extended Keypad Character Set (Continued)  
Extended Keypad  
Keystroke  
7012  
7013  
7014  
7015  
7016  
7017  
7018  
Home  
Enter  
Escape  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Left Arrow  
Right Arrow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-28 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Symbologies  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5  
Scanning Sequence Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5  
Symbology Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6  
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10  
Enable/Disable UPC-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11  
Enable/Disable EAN-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11  
Enable/Disable EAN-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12  
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15  
Transmit UPC-A/UPC-E/UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15  
UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17  
UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19  
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20  
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21  
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22  
Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22  
Enable/Disable Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22  
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23  
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23  
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24  
Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24  
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25  
Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26  
Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30  
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31  
Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32  
Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32  
Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32  
Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34  
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34  
Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38  
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38  
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42  
Discrete 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43  
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43  
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43  
Codabar (NW - 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45  
Enable/Disable Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-3  
Set Lengths for Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46  
CLSI Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48  
NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48  
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49  
Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49  
Set Lengths for MSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49  
MSI Check Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52  
MSI Check Digit Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52  
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-53  
RSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53  
RSS Limited. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54  
Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-55  
Redundancy Level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55  
Redundancy Level 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55  
Redundancy Level 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56  
Redundancy Level 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56  
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-57  
Security Level 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57  
Security Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57  
Security Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58  
Security Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58  
Bi-directional Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-5  
Introduction  
This chapter describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes  
necessary for selecting these features for the scanner. Before programming, follow the  
instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.  
The scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Default Table on page 8-  
6 (also see Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous  
scanner defaults). If the default values suit the requirements, programming may not be  
necessary. Features values are set by scanning single bar codes or short bar code sequences.  
To return all features to their default values, scan the Set All Defaults bar code on page 4-5.  
If the USB cable is not being used, a host type must be selected. See each host chapter for  
specific host information.  
Scanning Sequence Examples  
In most cases, only one bar code needs to be scanned to set a specific parameter value. For  
example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit  
UPC-A Check Digit bar code listed under Transmit UPC-A/UPC-E/UPC-E1 Check Digit on  
page 8-15. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a  
successful parameter entry.  
Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require that several bar codes be  
scanned in the proper sequence. See the individual parameter, like Set Length(s) for D 2  
of 5, for this procedure.  
Errors While Scanning  
Unless otherwise specified, if an error is made during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the  
correct parameter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
8-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Symbology Default Parameters  
Table 8-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the  
appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Symbologies Parameters section beginning on 8-10.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 8-1. Symbology Default Table  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
UPC/EAN  
UPC-A  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
8-10  
8-10  
8-11  
8-11  
8-12  
8-12  
8-14  
8-15  
8-15  
8-16  
8-16  
8-17  
8-18  
8-19  
8-20  
UPC-E  
UPC-E1  
EAN-13/JAN 13  
EAN-8/JAN 8  
Bookland EAN  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits)  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy  
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit  
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit  
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit  
UPC-A Preamble  
Ignore Supplementals  
14  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
System Character  
System Character  
System Character  
Disable  
UPC-E Preamble  
UPC-E1 Preamble  
Convert UPC-E to A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-7  
Table 8-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
8-21  
Convert UPC-E1 to A  
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend  
Code 128  
Disable  
Disable  
8-22  
Code 128  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
8-22  
8-23  
8-23  
UCC/EAN-128  
ISBT 128  
Code 39  
Code 39  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
2 to 55  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
8-24  
8-24  
8-25  
8-26  
8-27  
8-29  
8-30  
8-31  
Trioptic Code 39  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32  
Code 32 Prefix  
Set Length(s) for Code 39  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit  
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion  
Code 93  
Code 93  
Disable  
4 to 55  
8-32  
8-32  
Set Lengths for Code 93  
Code 11  
Code 11  
Disable  
4 to 41  
8-34  
8-34  
Set Lengths for Code 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table 8-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5  
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13  
Discrete 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5)  
Discrete 2 of 5  
Default  
One Check Digit  
Disable  
Page Number  
8-36  
8-37  
Enable  
14  
8-38  
8-38  
8-41  
8-42  
8-43  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
12  
8-44  
8-44  
Set Lengths for D 2 of 5  
Codabar (NW - 7)  
Codabar  
Disable  
5 to 55  
Disable  
Disable  
8-46  
8-47  
8-49  
8-49  
Set Lengths for Codabar  
CLSI Editing  
NOTIS Editing  
MSI  
MSI  
Disable  
6 to 55  
One  
8-50  
8-50  
8-52  
8-53  
Set Lengths for MSI  
MSI Check Digits  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)  
Disable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-9  
Table 8-1. Symbology Default Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
MSI Check Digit Algorithm  
Default  
Page Number  
Mod 10/Mod 10  
8-53  
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)  
RSS 14  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
8-54  
8-54  
8-55  
8-55  
RSS Limited  
RSS Expanded  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN  
Symbology - Specific Security Levels  
Redundancy Level  
1
8-56  
8-58  
8-60  
Security Levels  
0
Bi-directional Redundancy  
Disable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
UPC/EAN  
Enable/Disable UPC-A  
To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable UPC-A  
Disable UPC-A  
Enable/Disable UPC-E  
To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable UPC-E  
Disable UPC-E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Symbologies  
8-11  
Enable/Disable UPC-E1  
UPC-E1 is disabled by default.  
To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.  
Enable UPC-E1  
*Disable UPC-E1  
Enable/Disable EAN-13  
To enable or disable EAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13  
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Enable/Disable EAN-8  
To enable or disable EAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8  
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8  
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN  
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Bookland EAN  
*Disable Bookland EAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Symbologies  
8-13  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals  
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC  
A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 13+2). Six options are available.  
•
If Decode UPC/EAN Only With Supplementals is selected, UPC/EAN symbols  
without supplementals are not decoded.  
•
If Ignore Supplementals is selected, and the scanner is presented with a  
UPC/EAN with a supplemental, the UPC/EAN is decoded and the supplemental  
bar code is ignored.  
•
•
An Autodiscriminate Option is also available. If this option is selected, choose an  
appropriate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy value from the next page.  
A value of 14 or more is recommended.  
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode to enable only EAN13 bar codes starting  
with a ‘378’ or ‘379’ prefix to be delayed by the supplemental search process. All  
other UPC/EAN bar codes are exempted from the search and are reported instantly  
upon their decode.  
•
•
Select Enable 978 Supplemental Mode to enable only EAN13 bar codes starting  
with a ‘978’ prefix to be delayed by the supplemental search process. All other  
UPC/EAN bar codes are exempted from the search and are reported instantly upon  
their decode.  
Select Enable Smart Supplemental Mode to enable only EAN13 bar codes  
starting with a ‘378’, ‘379’, or ‘978’ prefix to be delayed by the supplemental  
search process. All other UPC/EAN bar codes are exempted from the search and  
are reported instantly upon their decode.  
In order to minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, it is  
recommended to select either to decode or ignore supplemental  
characters.  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)  
*Ignore Supplementals  
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals  
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode  
Enable 978 Supplemental Mode  
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symbologies  
8-15  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy  
With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals selected, this option adjusts the  
number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. The  
range is from two to thirty times. 14 or above is recommended when decoding a mix of  
UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals, and the autodiscriminate option is  
selected. The default is set at 14.  
Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar  
codes beginning on page D-3 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. Single digit numbers must  
have a leading zero. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy  
Transmit UPC-A/UPC-E/UPC-E1 Check Digit  
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data.  
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-  
A, UPC-E or UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.  
UPC-A Check Digit  
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit  
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
UPC-E Check Digit  
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit  
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit  
UPC-E1 Check Digit  
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit  
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Symbologies  
8-17  
UPC-A Preamble  
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System  
Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-A preamble to the host device:  
transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for  
USA), and no preamble transmitted. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.  
No Preamble  
(<DATA>)  
*System Character  
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
System Character & Country Code  
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-18 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
UPC-E Preamble  
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System  
Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E preamble to the host device:  
transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for  
USA), and no preamble transmitted. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.  
No Preamble  
(<DATA>)  
*System Character  
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
System Character & Country Code  
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-19  
UPC-E1 Preamble  
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System  
Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E1 preamble to the host device:  
transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for  
USA), and no preamble transmitted. Select the appropriate option to match the host system.  
No Preamble  
(<DATA>)  
*System Character  
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
System Character & Country Code  
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-20 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A  
When enabled, UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data is converted to UPC-A format  
before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by  
UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).  
When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion.  
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-21  
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A  
When enabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is converted to UPC-A format before transmission.  
After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming  
selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).  
When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.  
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-22 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend  
When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make  
them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols.  
When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is.  
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend  
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend  
Code 128  
Enable/Disable Code 128  
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable Code 128  
Disable Code 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Symbologies  
8-23  
Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128  
To enable or disable UCC/EAN-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable UCC/EAN-128  
Disable UCC/EAN-128  
Enable/Disable ISBT 128  
To enable or disable ISBT 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable ISBT 128  
Disable ISBT 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8-24 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code 39  
Enable/Disable Code 39  
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
*Enable Code 39  
Disable Code 39  
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39  
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges.  
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code  
39, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Trioptic Code 39  
*Disable Trioptic Code 39  
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled  
simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Symbologies  
8-25  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32  
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the  
appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.  
Code 39 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Convert Code 39 to Code 32  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-26 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code 32 Prefix  
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to  
all Code 32 bar codes.  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to  
function.  
Enable Code 32 Prefix  
*Disable Code 32 Prefix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-27  
Set Lengths for Code 39  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for Code 39 may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is  
enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options.  
When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single  
digit numbers, single digit numbers must always be preceded by a  
leading zero.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Code 39  
symbols containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only  
Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1  
followed by 4. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 39 - One Discrete Length  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Code 39  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-28 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode a Code 39 symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code  
39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within  
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading  
zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 39 - Length Within Range  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode Code 39 symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Code 39 - Any Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-29  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification  
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to  
verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only those Code 39  
symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded when this feature is enabled.  
This feature should only be enabled if the code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check  
digit.  
Enable Code 39 Check Digit  
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-30 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit  
Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit  
(Disable)  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter  
to function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-31  
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion  
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII  
character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code  
below.  
See Table 5-2 on page 5-19 and for the mapping of Code 39 characters to ASCII values.  
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII  
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII  
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled  
simultaneously.  
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and  
is therefore described in the "ASCII Character Set" Table for the  
appropriate interface. The Wedge Host conversion table can be found  
on 5-5, USB Host conversion table can be found on 7-6, and RS-232  
Host conversion table can be found on 6-5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-32 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code 93  
Enable/Disable Code 93  
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Code 93  
*Disable Code 93  
Set Lengths for Code 93  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for Code 93 may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows scanner to decode only those Code 93 symbols  
containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes beginning on  
page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols  
with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. In  
case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 93 - One Discrete Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Symbologies  
8-33  
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Code 93  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode a Code 93 symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code  
93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within  
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading  
zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 93 - Length Within Range  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode Code 93 symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner’s capability.  
Code 93 - Any Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-34 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code 11  
Code 11  
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Code 11  
*Disable Code 11  
Set Lengths for Code 11  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for Code 11 may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Code 11  
symbols containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only  
Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1  
followed by 4. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 11 - One Discrete Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Symbologies  
8-35  
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Code 11  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode a Code 11 symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code  
11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within  
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading  
zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Code 11 - Length Within Range  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode Code 11 symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Code 11 - Any Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-36 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification  
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that  
the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit  
mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The options are to check for one check digit,  
check for two check digits, or disable the feature.  
To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits  
encoded in the Code 11 symbols.  
Disable  
*
One Check Digit  
Two Check Digits  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-37  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits  
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)  
(Disable)  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter  
to function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-38 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5  
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an  
Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages.  
*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5  
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for I 2 of 5 may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those I 2 of 5  
symbols containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2  
of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed  
by 4. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Symbologies  
8-39  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those I 2 of 5  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2  
of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within  
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading  
zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-40 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a  
scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a  
complete scan, yielding less data than is actually encoded in the bar  
code. To prevent this from happening, it is recommended that specific  
lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) be  
selected for I 2 of 5 applications.  
I 2 of 5 - Any Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-41  
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification  
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to  
verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS),  
or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.  
*Disable  
USS Check Digit  
OPCC Check Digit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8-42 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit  
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit  
(Disable)  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13  
This parameter converts a 14 character I 2 of 5 code into EAN-13, and transmits to the host  
as EAN-13. In order to accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code  
must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.  
Scanning a single bar code below, Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable), accomplishes  
this function.  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13  
(Enable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Symbologies  
8-43  
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13  
(Disable)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8-44 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Discrete 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5)  
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5  
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Discrete 2 of 5  
*Disable Discrete 2 of 5  
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for D 2 of 5 may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those D 2 of 5  
symbols containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D  
2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1  
followed by 4. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Symbologies  
8-45  
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those D 2 of 5  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode an D 2 of 5 symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2  
of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within  
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading  
zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-46 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a  
scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a  
complete scan, yielding less data than is actually encoded in the bar  
code. To prevent this from happening, it is recommended that specific  
lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths)  
be selected for D 2 of 5 applications.  
D 2 of 5 - Any Length  
Codabar (NW - 7)  
Enable/Disable Codabar  
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable Codabar  
*Disable Codabar  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Symbologies  
8-47  
Set Lengths for Codabar  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for Codabar may be set for any length,  
one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Codabar  
symbols containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only  
Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1  
followed by 4. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Codabar - One Discrete Length  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those Codabar  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar -  
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change  
the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-48 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode a Codabar symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode  
Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length  
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by  
a leading zero). In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Codabar - Length Within Range  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode Codabar symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Codabar - Any Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbologies  
8-49  
CLSI Editing  
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after  
the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature  
if the host system requires this data format.  
Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.  
Enable CLSI Editing  
*Disable CLSI Editing  
NOTIS Editing  
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar  
symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format.  
Enable NOTIS Editing  
*Disable NOTIS Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8-50 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
MSI  
Enable/Disable MSI  
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.  
Enable MSI  
*Disable MSI  
Set Lengths for MSI  
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters),  
including check digit(s) the code contains. Lengths for MSI may be set for any length, one  
or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.  
One Discrete Length - This option allows the scanner to decode only those MSI symbols  
containing a selected length. Lengths are selected from the numeric bar codes beginning on  
page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols  
with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. In case  
of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
MSI - One Discrete Length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Symbologies  
8-51  
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)  
Two Discrete Lengths - This option allows the scanner to decode only those MSI  
symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Lengths are selected from the numeric  
bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to  
decode only those MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two  
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. In case of an error, or to change the  
selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths  
Length Within Range - This option allows the scanner to decode an MSI symbol  
with a specific length range. The length range is selected from numeric bar codes  
beginning on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI  
symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range.  
Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero).  
In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
MSI - Length Within Range  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-52 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)  
Any Length - This option allows the scanner to decode MSI symbols containing any  
number of characters within the scanner capability.  
Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a  
scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a  
complete scan, yielding less data than is actually encoded in the bar  
code. To prevent this from happening, it is recommended that specific  
lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) be  
selected for MSI applications.  
MSI - Any Length  
MSI Check Digits  
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The  
second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, enable the  
verification of the second check digit by scanning the bar code below.  
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 8-53 for the selection of second digit algorithms.  
*One MSI Check Digit  
Two MSI Check Digits  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Symbologies  
8-53  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)  
Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)  
(Enable)  
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)  
(Disable)  
MSI Check Digit Algorithm  
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the  
bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit.  
MOD 10/MOD 11  
*MOD 10/MOD 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8-54 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)  
RSS  
The variants of RSS are RSS 14, RSS Expanded, and RSS Limited. The limited and  
expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or  
disable each variant of RSS.  
RSS 14  
Enable RSS 14  
*Disable RSS 14  
RSS Limited  
Enable RSS Limited  
*Disable RSS Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Symbologies  
8-55  
RSS Expanded  
Enable RSS Expanded  
*Disable RSS Expanded  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN  
This parameter only applies to RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols not decoded as part of a  
Composite symbol. When this conversion is enabled, RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols  
encoding a single zero as the first digit have the leading '010' stripped and the bar code  
reported as EAN-13.  
Bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros have the leading '0100'  
stripped and the bar code reported as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter to transmit  
the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the  
system character nor the check digit can be stripped.  
Enable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN  
*Disable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8-56 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Redundancy Level  
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Higher redundancy levels are selected  
for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s  
aggressiveness decreases.  
Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.  
Redundancy Level 1  
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:  
Code Type  
Code Length  
8 characters or less  
Codabar  
MSI  
4 characters or less  
8 characters or less  
8 characters or less  
D 2 of 5  
I 2 of 5  
*Redundancy Level 1  
Redundancy Level 2  
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:  
Code Type  
Code Length  
All  
All  
Redundancy Level 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Symbologies  
8-57  
Redundancy Level 3  
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded.  
The following codes must be read three times:  
Code Type  
MSI Plessey  
Code Length  
4 characters or less  
D 2 of 5  
I 2 of 5  
Codabar  
8 characters or less  
8 characters or less  
8 characters or less  
Redundancy Level 3  
Redundancy Level 4  
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:  
Code Type  
Code Length  
All  
All  
Redundancy Level 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-58 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Security Level  
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for UPC/EAN bar codes. Increasing levels  
of security are provided for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse  
relationship between security and scanner decode speed, so be sure to choose only that level  
of security necessary for any given application.  
Security Level 0  
This is the default setting which allows the scanner to operate fastest, while providing  
sufficient security in decoding “in-spec” UPC/EAN bar codes.  
*Security Level 0  
Security Level 1  
As bar code quality levels diminish, certain characters become prone to misdecodes before  
others (i.e., 1, 2, 7, 8). If the scanner is misdecoding poorly printed bar codes, and the  
misdecodes are limited to these characters, select this security level.  
Security Level 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Symbologies  
8-59  
Security Level 2  
If the scanner is misdecoding poorly printed bar codes, and the misdecodes are not limited  
to characters 1, 2, 7, and 8, select this security level.  
Security Level 2  
Security Level 3  
If Security Level 2 has been tried, and the scanner is still misdecoding, select this security  
level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against misdecoding severely  
out of spec bar codes. Selection of this level of security may significantly impair the  
decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is necessary, try to improve the  
quality of the bar codes.  
Security Level 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-60 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Bi-Directional Redundancy  
Bi-directional redundancy is used for added security to linear code type security levels.  
When enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and  
reverse) before reporting a good decode.  
Enable Bi-Directional Redundancy  
*Disable Bi-Directional Redundancy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Scanning Sequence Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Miscellaneous Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Scan Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Prefix/Suffix Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Scan Data Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
FN1 Substitution Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
9-3  
Introduction  
This chapter includes commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted  
to the host device. In addition to these bar codes for data formatting, see each host chapter  
for the appropriate host connections and host device features for the scanner. See Chapter  
8, Symbologies and Chapter 10, Advanced Data Formatting for customizing data for  
transmission to the host device.  
Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.  
The scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
Default Table on page 9-4 (also see Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all host  
device and miscellaneous scanner defaults). If the default values suit the requirements,  
programming may not be necessary. Features values are set by scanning single bar codes  
or short bar code sequences.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Scanning Sequence Examples  
In most cases, only one bar code needs to be scanned to set a specific parameter value.  
Parameters, such as Prefix Value, require that several bar codes be scanned in the proper  
sequence. See each individual parameter for descriptions of this procedure.  
Errors While Scanning  
Unless otherwise specified, if an error is made during a scanning sequence, re-scan the  
correct parameter.  
Miscellaneous Default Parameters  
Table 9-1 lists the defaults for miscellaneous scanner options parameters. To change any  
option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters  
section beginning on page 9-5.  
See Chapter A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences,  
hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.  
Table 9-1. Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table  
Parameter  
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
Transmit Code ID Character  
Scan Angle  
Default  
Page Number  
None  
9-5  
Normal Angle  
7013 <CR><LF>  
7013 <CR><LF>  
Data As Is  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-7  
9-9  
Prefix Value  
Suffix Value  
Scan Data Transmission Format  
FN1 Substitution Values  
Set FN1 Substitution  
Value  
Transmit “No Read” Message  
Disable No Read  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
9-5  
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters  
Transmit Code ID Character  
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This may be useful  
when the scanner is decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character  
prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the  
decoded symbol.  
The user may select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code  
ID character. For Code ID Characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-3 and AIM  
Code Identifiers on page B-4.  
Symbol Code ID Character  
AIM Code ID Character  
*None  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Scan Angle  
The scanner supports two scan angles. This parameter provides two options for the length  
of the laser scanning beam. Use the bar codes below to change scan angles.  
*Normal Angle  
Alternate Angle  
Prefix/Suffix Values  
A prefix/suffix may be appended to scan data for use in data editing. These values are set  
by scanning a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes) that corresponds to key codes for  
various terminals. For conversion information, see the ASCII Character Set tables in the  
appropriate host chapter. Numeric bar codes begin on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric  
Bar Codes. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-7.  
Scan Prefix  
Scan Suffix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
9-7  
Scan Data Transmission Format  
To change the Scan Data Transmission Format, scan the Scan Options bar code below.  
Then select one of four options:  
•
•
•
•
Data As Is  
<DATA> <SUFFIX>  
<PREFIX> <DATA>  
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX>  
When a selection is made, scan the Enter bar code on page 9-8. In case of a mistake, scan  
the Data Format Cancel bar code on page 9-8.  
To program a carriage return/enter after each bar code scanned, scan the following bar  
codes in order:  
1. <SCAN OPTIONS>  
2. <DATA> <SUFFIX>  
3. Enter (on page 9-8)  
Scan Options  
*Data As Is  
<DATA> <SUFFIX>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)  
<PREFIX> <DATA>  
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX>  
Enter  
Data Format Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
9-9  
FN1 Substitution Values  
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. When  
enabled any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code is substituted with a value. This  
value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key)  
1. To select a FN1 Substitution Value, scan the bar code below.  
Set FN1 Substitution Value  
2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set  
table for the currently installed host interface. Enter the 4-digit "ASCII Value" by  
scanning each digit in the Numeric Bar Codes on page D-1.  
3. To correct an error or change the selection, scan CANCEL.  
To enable FN1 Substitution for Wedge, scan the Enable Keyboard Wedge FN1  
Substitution bar code on page 5-15.  
To enable FN1 Substitution for USB HID Keyboard, scan the Enable USB Keyboard FN1  
Substitution bar code on page 7-14.  
Transmit “No Read” Message  
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not a “No Read” message is transmitted. When  
enabled, the characters NR are transmitted when a bar code is not decoded. When disabled,  
if a symbol does not decode, nothing is sent to the host.  
Enable No Read  
*Disable No Read  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
9-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Advanced Data Formatting  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Using ADF Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Alternate Rule Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6  
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8  
Special Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Begin New Rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9  
Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10  
Quit Entering Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10  
Disable Rule Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Code Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16  
Message Containing A Specific Data String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22  
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40  
Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52  
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53  
Send Right Control Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96  
Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103  
Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-3  
Introduction  
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to  
the host device. Scan data can be edited to suit the particular requirements.  
ADF can be implemented through scanning a related series of bar codes, which begin on  
page 10-9 which allows the scanner to be setup and programmed with Advanced Data  
Formatting (ADF) Rules.  
Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions  
In ADF, data is customized through rules. These rules perform detailed actions when the  
data meets certain criteria. One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to  
single or multiple actions.  
For instance, a data formatting rule could be the following:  
Criteria:When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is  
the string “129”,  
Actions:pad all sends with zeros to length 8,  
send all data up to X,  
send a space.  
If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 is scanned, the following is transmitted:  
00001299<space>. If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 is scanned, this rule is ignored  
because the length criteria has not been met.  
The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs.  
Using ADF Bar Codes  
When a rule is programed, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before starting  
to scan.  
To program each data formatting rule:  
•
•
Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 10-9.  
Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type  
(e.g., Code 128), code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g.,  
the digits “129”). These options are described in Criteria on page 10-12.  
•
Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule  
specify how to format the data for transmission. These options are described in  
ADF Bar Code Menu Example on page 10-4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
•
•
Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 10-9. This places the rule in  
the “top” position in the rule buffer.  
In case of errors made during this process, some special-purpose bar codes may be  
useful: Erase Criteria and Start Again, Erase Actions and Start Again, Erase  
Previously Saved Rule, etc.  
Criteria, actions, and entire rules may be erased by scanning the appropriate bar code (see  
page 10-10).  
Use the Beeper Definitions on page 2-4 as a guide for the programming steps.  
ADF Bar Code Menu Example  
This section provides an example of how ADF rules are entered and used for scan data.  
An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and  
destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has  
products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the manufacturer. The Code 128 bar  
codes have the following format:  
MMMMMPPPPPDD  
Where:  
M = Manufacturer ID  
P = Part Number  
D = Destination Code  
The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID  
<CTRL M>, part number <CTRL P>, and destination code <CTRL D>. At this center the  
UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code.  
The following rules need to be entered:  
When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the  
manufacturer ID key <CTRL M>, send the next 5 characters, send the part number key  
<CTRL P>, send the next 2 characters, send the destination code key <CTRL D>.  
When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID  
key <CTRL M>.  
To enter these rules, follow the steps below:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-5  
Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule  
Step  
Bar Code  
On Page  
Beep Indication  
1
Begin New Rule  
Code 128  
10-9  
High High  
2
10-13  
10-29  
10-56  
10-29  
10-57  
10-28  
10-55  
10-9  
High High  
3
Send next 5 characters  
Send <CTRL M>  
Send next 5 characters  
Send <CTRL P>  
Send next 2 characters  
Send <CTRL D>  
Save Rule  
High High  
4
High High  
5
High High  
6
High High  
7
High High  
8
High High  
9
High Low High Low  
Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule  
Step  
Bar Code  
Begin New Rule  
UPC/EAN  
On Page  
10-9  
Beep Indication  
High High  
1
2
3
4
5
10-15  
10-28  
10-56  
10-9  
High High  
Send all remaining data  
Send <CTRL M>  
Save Rule  
High High  
High High  
High Low High Low  
In case of errors while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page  
10-10. If the rule is already saved, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page  
10-10.  
Alternate Rule Sets  
ADF rules may be grouped into one of four alternate sets which can be turned on and off  
when needed. This is useful to format the same message in different ways. For example, a  
Code 128 bar code contains the following information:  
Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits)  
This bar code might look like this:  
245671243701500  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
where:  
Class = 24  
Stock Number = 56712437  
Price = 01500  
Ordinarily, data is sent as follows:  
24 (class key)  
56712437 (stock key)  
01500 (enter key)  
But, when there is a sale, send only the following:  
24 (class key)  
56712437 (stock key)  
and the cashier keys the price manually.  
To implement this, first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation. This rule  
may look like this:  
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key,  
send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter  
key.  
The “sale” rule may look like this:  
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key,  
send the next 8 characters, send the stock key.  
To switch between the two sets of rules, a “switching rule” must be programmed. This rule  
specifies what type of bar code must be scanned to switch between the rule sets. For  
example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan  
the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows:  
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1.  
Another rule could be programmed to switch back.  
When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-7  
The switching back to normal rules can also be done in the “sale” rule. For example, the  
rule may look like this:  
When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key,  
send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1.  
It is recommended that the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 10-11 be scanned after  
programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set.  
In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, it is possible to enable or  
disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on 10-11.  
Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes)  
The order of programming individual rules is important.The most general rule should be  
programmed last.  
All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the  
“top” of a rules list. If three rules have been created, the list would be configured as follows:  
Third Rule  
Second Rule  
First Rule  
When data is scanned, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria  
matches (and therefore, if the actions should occur). Input is modified into the data format  
specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be sure that the most general rule is  
the last one programmed.  
For example, if the THIRD rule states:  
When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key.  
And the SECOND rule states:  
When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then  
send the ENTER key, then send all remaining data.  
If a Code 128 bar code of length 12 were scanned, the THIRD rule would be in effect. The  
SECOND rule would appear to not function.  
Note also that ADF rules are actually created when the standard data editing functions are  
used. Scan options are entered as ADF rules, and the hierarchy mentioned above also  
applies to them. For the scanner, this applies to prefix/suffix programming in the parameter  
Scan Data Transmission Format.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order of their creation is also  
important.  
Default Rules  
Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have  
one or more default rules burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules  
first, then the default rules. Default rules can be disabled by entering the following general  
rule in the user programmable buffer:  
When receiving scan data, send all data.  
Since this rule always applies, ADF never goes into the default rules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-9  
Special Commands  
Pause Duration  
This parameter along with the Send Pause parameter on page 10-33 allows a pause to be  
inserted in the data transmission. Pauses are set by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two  
bar codes), and are measured in 0.1 second intervals. For example, scanning bar codes “0”  
and “1” inserts a 0.1 second pause; “0” and “5” gives a 0.5 second delay. Numeric bar  
codes begin on page D-1 in Chapter D, Numeric Bar Codes. In case of an error, or to  
change the selection, scan Numeric Cancel on page D-6.  
Pause Duration  
Begin New Rule  
Scan this bar code to start entering a new rule  
.
Begin New Rule  
Save Rule  
Scan this bar code to save the entered rule.  
Save Rule  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
10-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Erase  
Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules.  
Erase Criteria And Start Again  
Erase Actions And Start Again  
Erase Previously Saved Rule  
Erase All Rules  
Quit Entering Rules  
Scan this bar code to quit entering rules.  
Quit Entering Rules  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-11  
Disable Rule Set  
Use these bar codes to disable rule sets.  
Disable Rule Set 1  
Disable Rule Set 3  
Disable All Rule Sets  
Disable Rule Set 2  
Disable Rule Set 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Criteria  
Code Types  
Select any number of code types to be affected. All selected codes must be scanned in  
succession, prior to selecting other criteria. If a code type is not selected, all code types are  
affected.  
Scan the bar codes for all code types desired before selecting other criteria.  
Code 39  
Codabar  
RSS 14  
RSS Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-13  
RSS Expanded  
Code 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code Types (continued)  
D 2 OF 5  
I 2 OF 5  
UPC-A  
IATA 2 OF 5  
Code 93  
UPC-E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-15  
Code Types (continued)  
EAN-8  
EAN-13  
MSI  
UCC/EAN 128  
UPC-E1  
Bookland EAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code Types (continued)  
Trioptic Code 39  
Code 11  
EAN 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-17  
Code Lengths  
Define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. If a code length is not  
selected, selected code types of any length are affected.  
Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code types must  
contain. Select one length per rule only.  
1 Character  
2 Characters  
3 Characters  
4 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-18 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code Lengths (continued)  
5 Characters  
7 Characters  
9 Characters  
6 Characters  
8 Characters  
10 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-19  
Code Lengths (continued)  
11 Characters  
12 Characters  
13 Characters  
14 Characters  
15 Characters  
16 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-20 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code Lengths (continued)  
17 Characters  
19 Characters  
21 Characters  
18 Characters  
20 Characters  
22 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-21  
Code Lengths (continued)  
23 Characters  
24 Characters  
25 Characters  
26 Characters  
27 Characters  
28 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-22 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Code Lengths (continued)  
29 Characters  
30 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-23  
Message Containing A Specific Data String  
Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific  
character or data string, or contains a specific character or data string.  
There are 4 features:  
•
•
•
•
Specific String at Start  
Specific String, Any Location  
Any Message OK  
Rule Belongs to Set  
Specific String at Start  
Scan this bar code, then scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters  
(up to a total of 8) in the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 10-107.  
After scanning the following bar code:  
1. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 10-107.  
2. Scan End of Message on page 10-118.  
Specific String At Start  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10-24 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Specific String, Any Location  
Scan this bar code, then, using the Numeric Keypad on page 10-25, scan a two-digit number  
representing the position (use a leading “zero” if necessary). Then scan the desired  
character or characters (up to a total of 8) on the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 10-107,  
followed by the End of Message bar code on page 10-118.  
After scanning the following bar code:  
1. Enter a location using the “Numeric Keypad” on page 25.  
2. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 10-107.  
3. Scan End of Message on page 10-118.  
Specific String Any Location  
Any Message OK  
By not scanning any bar code, all selected code types are formatted, regardless of  
information contained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-25  
Numeric Keypad  
Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the alphanumeric keyboard.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-26 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Numeric Keypad (continued)  
6
7
8
9
Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-27  
Rule Belongs To Set  
Select the set a rule belongs to. (There are four possible rule sets.) See Alternate Rule Sets  
on page 10-5 for more information about rule sets.  
Scan a bar code below to select which set a rule belongs to.  
Rule Belongs To Set 1  
Rule Belongs To Set 2  
Rule Belongs To Set 3  
Rule Belongs To Set 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-28 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Actions  
Select how to format the data for transmission.  
Send Data  
Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the  
Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 10-107, or send the next N characters. N = any number  
from 1 to 254, selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. Use these bar codes to send data.  
Send Data Up To Character  
Send All Data That Remains  
Send Next Character  
Send Next 2 Characters  
Send Next 3 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-29  
Send Data (continued)  
Send Next 4 Characters  
Send Next 5 Characters  
Send Next 6 Characters  
Send Next 7 Characters  
Send Next 8 Characters  
Send Next 9 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-30 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Data (continued)  
Send Next 10 Characters  
Send Next 12 Characters  
Send Next 14 Characters  
Send Next 11 Characters  
Send Next 13 Characters  
Send Next 15 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-31  
Send Data (continued)  
Send Next 16 Characters  
Send Next 17 Characters  
Send Next 18 Characters  
Send Next 19 Characters  
Send Next 20 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-32 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Setup Field(s)  
Table 10-1. Setup Field(s) Definitions  
Parameter  
Move Cursor  
Description  
Page  
Move Cursor To a Character  
Scan the Move Cursor To Character bar code on page 10-33  
10-33, then any printable ASCII character from the  
Alphanumeric Keyboard. When this is used, the  
cursor moves to the position after the matching  
character. If the character is not there, the rule fails  
and ADF tries the next rule.  
Move Cursor to Start of Data  
Move Cursor Past a Character  
Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the 10-33  
data.  
This parameter moves the cursor past all sequential  
occurrences of a selected character. For example, if the  
selected character is ‘A’, then the cursor moves past ‘A’,  
‘AA’, ‘AAA’, etc. Scan the Move Cursor Past Character  
bar code on page 10-33, then select a character from the  
Alphanumeric Keyboard. If the character is not there, the  
cursor does not move (i.e., has no effect).  
10-33  
Skip Ahead “N” Characters  
Skip Back “N” Characters  
Send Preset Value  
Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of 10-34  
positions to move the cursor ahead.  
Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of 10-36  
positions to move the cursor back.  
Send prefix and/or suffix value by scanning the appropriate 10-38  
bar code. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix  
and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 9-6.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-33  
Move Cursor  
Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a  
character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 10-  
107.  
If there is no match when the rule is interpreted and the rule fails, the  
next rule is checked.  
Move Cursor To Character  
Move Cursor To Start  
Move Cursor Past Character  
Send Pause  
Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. The length of this  
pause is controlled by the value of the Pause Duration parameter.  
Send Pause  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
10-34 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Skip Ahead  
Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters.  
Skip Ahead 1 Character  
Skip Ahead 3 Characters  
Skip Ahead 5 Characters  
Skip Ahead 2 Characters  
Skip Ahead 4 Characters  
Skip Ahead 6 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-35  
Skip Ahead (continued)  
Skip Ahead 7 Characters  
Skip Ahead 8 Characters  
Skip Ahead 9 Characters  
Skip Ahead 10 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-36 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Skip Back  
Use the following bar codes to skip back characters.  
Skip Back 1 Character  
Skip Back 3 Characters  
Skip Back 5 Characters  
Skip Back 2 Characters  
Skip Back 4 Characters  
Skip Back 6 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-37  
Skip Back (continued)  
Skip Back 7 Characters  
Skip Back 8 Characters  
Skip Back 9 Characters  
Skip Back 10 Characters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-38 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Preset Value  
Use these bar codes to send preset values. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix  
and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 9-6.  
Send Prefix  
Send Suffix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-39  
Modify Data  
Modify data in the ways listed. The following actions work for all send commands that  
follow it within a rule. If pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send  
next 5 characters is programmed, three zeros are added to the first send, and the next send  
is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send  
Preset Value options.  
Remove All Spaces  
To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan this bar code.  
Remove All Spaces  
Crunch All Spaces  
To leave one space between words, scan this bar code. This also removes all leading and  
trailing spaces.  
Crunch All Spaces  
Stop Space Removal  
Scan this bar code to disable space removal.  
Stop Space Removal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-40 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Modify Data (Continued)  
Remove Leading Zeros  
Scan this bar code to remove all leading zeros.  
Remove Leading Zeros  
Stop Zero Removal  
Scan this bar code to disable the removal of zeros.  
Stop Zero Removal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-41  
Pad Data with Spaces  
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. This  
parameter is activated by Send commands.  
Pad Spaces To Length 1  
Pad Spaces To Length 2  
Pad Spaces To Length 3  
Pad Spaces To Length 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-42 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)  
Pad Spaces To Length 5  
Pad Spaces To Length 7  
Pad Spaces To Length 9  
Pad Spaces To Length 6  
Pad Spaces To Length 8  
Pad Spaces To Length 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-43  
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)  
Pad Spaces To Length 11  
Pad Spaces To Length 12  
Pad Spaces To Length 13  
Pad Spaces To Length 14  
Pad Spaces To Length 15  
Pad Spaces To Length 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-44 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)  
Pad Spaces To Length 17  
Pad Spaces To Length 19  
Pad Spaces To Length 21  
Pad Spaces To Length 18  
Pad Spaces To Length 20  
Pad Spaces To Length 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-45  
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)  
Pad Spaces To Length 23  
Pad Spaces To Length 24  
Pad Spaces To Length 25  
Pad Spaces To Length 26  
Pad Spaces To Length 27  
Pad Spaces To Length 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-46 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Spaces (continued)  
Pad Spaces To Length 29  
Pad Spaces To Length 30  
Stop Pad Spaces  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-47  
Pad Data with Zeros  
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. This  
parameter is activated by Send commands.  
Pad Zeros To Length 1  
Pad Zeros To Length 2  
Pad Zeros To Length 3  
Pad Zeros To Length 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-48 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)  
Pad Zeros To Length 5  
Pad Zeros To Length 7  
Pad Zeros To Length 9  
Pad Zeros To Length 6  
Pad Zeros To Length 8  
Pad Zeros To Length 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-49  
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)  
Pad Zeros To Length 11  
Pad Zeros To Length 12  
Pad Zeros To Length 13  
Pad Zeros To Length 14  
Pad Zeros To Length 15  
Pad Zeros To Length 16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-50 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)  
Pad Zeros To Length 17  
Pad Zeros To Length 19  
Pad Zeros To Length 21  
Pad Zeros To Length 18  
Pad Zeros To Length 20  
Pad Zeros To Length 22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-51  
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)  
Pad Zeros To Length 23  
Pad Zeros To Length 24  
Pad Zeros To Length 25  
Pad Zeros To Length 26  
Pad Zeros To Length 27  
Pad Zeros To Length 28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-52 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Pad Data with Zeros (continued)  
Pad Zeros To Length 29  
Pad Zeros To Length 30  
Stop Pad Zeros  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-53  
Beeps  
Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule.  
Beep Once  
Beep Twice  
Beep Three Times  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-54 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)  
Control Characters  
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keystroke  
Send Control 2  
Send Control A  
Send Control B  
Send Control C  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-55  
Control Characters (continued)  
Send Control D  
Send Control E  
Send Control F  
Send Control G  
Send Control H  
Send Control I  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-56 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Control Characters (continued)  
Send Control J  
Send Control L  
Send Control N  
Send Control K  
Send Control M  
Send Control O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-57  
Control Characters (continued)  
Send Control P  
Send Control Q  
Send Control R  
Send Control S  
Send Control T  
Send Control U  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10-58 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Control Characters (continued)  
Send Control V  
Send Control X  
Send Control Z  
Send Control W  
Send Control Y  
Send Control [  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-59  
Control Characters (continued)  
Send Control \  
Send Control ]  
Send Control 6  
Send Control -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-60 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters  
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keyboard characters  
Send Space  
Send !  
Send #  
Send %  
Send “  
Send $  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-61  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send &  
Send ‘  
Send (  
Send )  
Send *  
Send +  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-62 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send ,  
Send .  
Send 0  
Send -  
Send /  
Send 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-63  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send 2  
Send 3  
Send 4  
Send 5  
Send 6  
Send 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-64 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send 8  
Send :  
Send <  
Send 9  
Send ;  
Send =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-65  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send >  
Send ?  
Send @  
Send A  
Send B  
Send C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-66 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send D  
Send F  
Send H  
Send E  
Send G  
Send I  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-67  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send J  
Send K  
Send L  
Send M  
Send N  
Send O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-68 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send P  
Send R  
Send T  
Send Q  
Send S  
Send U  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-69  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send V  
Send W  
Send X  
Send Y  
Send Z  
Send [  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-70 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send \  
Send ^  
Send `  
Send ]  
Send _  
Send a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-71  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send b  
Send c  
Send d  
Send e  
Send f  
Send g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-72 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send h  
Send j  
Send l  
Send i  
Send k  
Send m  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-73  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send n  
Send o  
Send p  
Send q  
Send r  
Send s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-74 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send t  
Send v  
Send x  
Send u  
Send w  
Send y  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-75  
Keyboard Characters (continued)  
Send z  
Send {  
Send |  
Send }  
Send ~  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-76 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send ALT Characters  
Send Alt 2  
Send Alt B  
Send Alt D  
Send Alt A  
Send Alt C  
Send Alt E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-77  
Send ALT Characters (continued)  
Send Alt F  
Send Alt G  
Send Alt H  
Send Alt I  
Send Alt J  
Send Alt K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-78 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send ALT Characters (continued)  
Send Alt L  
Send Alt N  
Send Alt P  
Send Alt M  
Send Alt O  
Send Alt Q  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-79  
Send ALT Characters (continued)  
Send Alt R  
Send Alt S  
Send Alt T  
Send Alt U  
Send Alt V  
Send Alt W  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-80 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send ALT Characters (continued)  
Send Alt X  
Send Alt Z  
Send Alt \  
Send Alt Y  
Send Alt [  
Send Alt ]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-81  
Send ALT Characters (continued)  
Send Alt 6  
Send Alt -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-82 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Keypad Characters  
Send Keypad *  
Send Keypad -  
Send Keypad /  
Send Keypad +  
Send Keypad .  
Send Keypad 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-83  
Send Keypad Characters (continued)  
Send Keypad 1  
Send Keypad 2  
Send Keypad 3  
Send Keypad 4  
Send Keypad 5  
Send Keypad 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-84 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Keypad Characters (continued)  
Send Keypad 7  
Send Keypad 8  
Send Keypad 9  
Send Keypad Enter  
Send Keypad Numlock  
NUM LOCK  
Send Break Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-85  
Send Keypad Characters (continued)  
Send Delete Key  
Send Page Up Key  
Send End Key  
Send Page Down Key  
Send Pause Key  
Send Scroll Lock Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-86 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Keypad Characters (continued)  
Send Backspace Key  
Send Print Screen Key  
Send Home Key  
Send Tab Key  
Send Insert Key  
Send Enter Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-87  
Send Keypad Characters (continued)  
Send Escape Key  
Send Up Arrow Key  
Send Down Arrow Key  
Send Left Arrow Key  
Send Right Arrow Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-88 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Function Key  
Send F1 Key  
Send F3 Key  
Send F5 Key  
Send F2 Key  
Send F4 Key  
Send F6 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-89  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send F7 Key  
Send F8 Key  
Send F9 Key  
Send F10 Key  
Send F11 Key  
Send F12 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-90 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send F13 Key  
Send F15 Key  
Send F17 Key  
Send F14 Key  
Send F16 Key  
Send F18 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-91  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send F19 Key  
Send F20 Key  
Send F21 Key  
Send F22 Key  
Send F23 Key  
Send F24 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-92 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send PF1 Key  
Send PF3 Key  
Send PF5 Key  
Send PF2 Key  
Send PF4 Key  
Send PF6 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-93  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send PF7 Key  
Send PF8 Key  
Send PF9 Key  
Send PF10 Key  
Send PF11 Key  
Send PF12 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-94 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send PF13 Key  
Send PF15 Key  
Send PF17 Key  
Send PF14 Key  
Send PF16 Key  
Send PF18 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-95  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send PF19 Key  
Send PF20 Key  
Send PF21 Key  
Send PF22 Key  
Send PF23 Key  
Send PF24 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-96 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Function Key (continued)  
Send PF25 Key  
Send PF27 Key  
Send PF29 Key  
Send PF26 Key  
Send PF28 Key  
Send PF30 Key  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-97  
Send Right Control Key  
The “Send Right Control Key” action sends a tap (press and release) of the Right Control  
Key.  
Send Right Control Key  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters  
The “Send Graphic User Interface Character” actions tap the specified key while holding  
the System Dependent Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic  
User Interface key is dependant upon the attached system:  
Send GUI 0  
Send GUI 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-98 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send GUI 2  
Send GUI 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-99  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI 4  
Send GUI 6  
Send GUI 8  
Send GUI 5  
Send GUI 7  
Send GUI 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-100 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI A  
Send GUI B  
Send GUI C  
Send GUI D  
Send GUI E  
Send GUI F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI G  
Send GUI I  
Send GUI K  
Send GUI H  
Send GUI J  
Send GUI L  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-102 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI M  
Send GUI N  
Send GUI O  
Send GUI P  
Send GUI Q  
Send GUI R  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI S  
Send GUI U  
Send GUI W  
Send GUI T  
Send GUI V  
Send GUI X  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-104 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)  
Send GUI Y  
Send GUI Z  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Turn On/Off Rule Sets  
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.  
Turn On Rule Set 1  
Turn On Rule Set 2  
Turn On Rule Set 3  
Turn On Rule Set 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-106 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Turn On/Off Rule Sets (continued)  
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.  
Turn Off Rule Set 1  
Turn Off Rule Set 2  
Turn Off Rule Set 3  
Turn Off Rule Set 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard  
Space  
#
%
+
$
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10-108 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
-
(Dash)  
.
/
!
“
&
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
“
(
)
:
;
<
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-110 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
=
?
[
>
@
\
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
]
^
_
(Underscore)  
`
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the  
numeric keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-112 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
0
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
4
5
7
9
6
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-114 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
A
C
E
B
D
F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
G
H
I
J
K
L
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-116 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
M
O
Q
N
P
R
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
S
T
V
X
U
W
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-118 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
Y
Z
Cancel  
End of Message  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
a
b
d
f
c
e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-120 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
g
h
i
j
k
l
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
m
n
p
r
o
q
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-122 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
s
t
u
v
w
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Data Formatting  
10-  
Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)  
y
z
{
|
}
~
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-124 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Standard Default Parameters  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Default Parameters A-3  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table  
Parameter Default  
Page Number  
User Preferences  
Set Default Parameter  
Beeper Tone  
All Defaults  
4-5  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-7  
4-8  
4-8  
4-10  
High  
Beeper Volume  
Power Mode  
High  
Continuous On  
3.0 sec  
Enable  
Level  
Laser On Time  
Beep After Good Decode  
Trigger Mode  
Aim Duration  
0.0 sec  
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters  
Keyboard Wedge Host Type  
IBM PC/AT& IBM PC  
Compatibles  
5-7  
1
Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes)  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Keystroke Delay  
North American  
Enable  
5-8  
5-10  
5-10  
5-11  
5-12  
5-12  
5-13  
0 msec (No Delay)  
Disable  
Intra-Keystroke Delay  
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation  
Caps Lock On  
Disable  
Disable  
Caps Lock Override  
Disable  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
Convert Wedge Data  
Do Not Convert Wedge  
Data  
5-14  
Function Key Mapping  
FN1 Substitution  
Disable  
Disable  
5-14  
5-15  
5-15  
Send Make and Break  
Send Make and Break  
Scan Codes  
RS-232 Host Parameters  
RS-232 Host Types  
Baud Rate  
1
Standard RS-232  
6-9  
9600  
6-10  
6-12  
6-13  
6-14  
6-14  
6-15  
6-18  
6-20  
6-21  
6-22  
6-23  
6-24  
6-25  
Parity  
None  
Check Receive Errors  
Stop Bit Select  
Enable  
1 Stop Bit  
8-Bit  
Data Bits  
Hardware Handshaking  
Software Handshaking  
Host Serial Response Time-out  
RTS Line State  
None  
None  
Minimum: 2 Sec  
Host: Low RTS  
Disable  
Beep on <BEL>  
Intercharacter Delay  
Minimum: 0 msec  
Nixdorf Mode A/B and OPOS/JPOS Beep/LED Options Normal Operation  
Ignore Unknown Characters  
Send Bar Code  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Default Parameters A-5  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
USB Host Parameters  
Default  
Page Number  
USB Device Type  
HID Keyboard Emulation  
North American  
No Delay (0 msec)  
Disable  
7-7  
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)  
USB Keystroke Delay  
USB CAPS Lock Override  
USB Ignore Unknown Characters  
Emulate Keypad  
7-8  
7-10  
7-11  
7-12  
7-13  
7-14  
7-14  
7-15  
7-15  
Enable  
Disable  
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution  
Function Key Mapping  
Simulated Caps Lock  
Convert Case  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
No Case Conversion  
UPC/EAN  
UPC-A  
Enable  
8-10  
8-10  
8-11  
8-11  
8-12  
8-12  
8-13  
8-15  
UPC-E  
Enable  
UPC-E1  
Disable  
EAN-13/JAN 13  
Enable  
EAN-8/JAN 8  
Enable  
Bookland EAN  
Disable  
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits)  
Ignore Supplementals  
14  
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter Default  
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit  
Page Number  
8-15  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit  
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit  
UPC-A Preamble  
UPC-E Preamble  
UPC-E1 Preamble  
Convert UPC-E to A  
Convert UPC-E1 to A  
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend  
Code 128  
8-16  
8-16  
System Character  
System Character  
System Character  
Disable  
8-17  
8-18  
8-19  
8-20  
Disable  
8-21  
Disable  
8-22  
Code 128  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
8-22  
8-23  
8-23  
UCC/EAN-128  
ISBT 128  
Code 39  
Code 39  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
2 to 55  
Disable  
8-24  
8-24  
8-25  
8-26  
8-27  
8-29  
Trioptic Code 39  
Convert Code 39 to Code 32  
Code 32 Prefix  
Set Length(s) for Code 39  
Code 39 Check Digit Verification  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Default Parameters A-7  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter Default  
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit  
Page Number  
8-30  
Disable  
Disable  
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion  
Code 93  
8-31  
Code 93  
Disable  
4 to 55  
8-32  
8-32  
Set Lengths for Code 93  
Code 11  
Code 11  
Disable  
4 to 41  
8-34  
8-34  
8-36  
8-37  
Set Lengths for Code 11  
Code 11 Check Digit Verification  
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5  
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification  
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit  
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13  
Discrete 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5)  
Discrete 2 of 5  
One Check Digit  
Disable  
Enable  
14  
8-38  
8-38  
8-41  
8-42  
8-42  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
12  
8-44  
8-44  
Set Lengths for D 2 of 5  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Default  
Page Number  
Codabar (NW - 7)  
Codabar  
Disable  
5 to 55  
Disable  
Disable  
8-46  
8-47  
8-49  
8-49  
Set Lengths for Codabar  
CLSI Editing  
NOTIS Editing  
MSI  
MSI  
Disable  
6 to 55  
One  
8-50  
8-50  
8-52  
8-53  
8-53  
Set Lengths for MSI  
MSI Check Digits  
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)  
MSI Check Digit Algorithm  
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)  
RSS 14  
Disable  
Mod 10/Mod 10  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
8-54  
8-54  
8-55  
8-55  
RSS Limited  
RSS Expanded  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN  
Symbology - Specific Security Levels  
Redundancy Level  
Security Levels  
1
8-56  
8-58  
8-60  
0
Bi-Directional Redundancy  
Disable  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Default Parameters A-9  
Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)  
Parameter  
Miscellaneous Scanner Options  
Transmit Code ID Character  
Scan Angle  
Default  
Page Number  
None  
9-5  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-7  
9-9  
Normal Angle  
7013 <CR><LF>  
7013 <CR><LF>  
Data As Is  
Prefix Value  
Suffix Value  
Scan Data Transmission Format  
FN1 Substitution Values  
Set FN1 Substitution  
Value  
Transmit “No Read” Message  
Disable No Read  
9-9  
1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Programming Reference  
Symbol Code Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
B-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Reference  
B-3  
Symbol Code Identifiers  
Table 2-1. Symbol Code Characters  
Code  
Character  
Code Type  
A
B
C
D
E
F
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13  
Code 39, Code 32  
Codabar  
Code 128  
Code 93  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA  
Code 11  
G
H
J
MSI  
K
L
M
R
UCC/EAN-128  
Bookland EAN  
Trioptic Code 39  
RSS Family  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
B-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
AIM Code Identifiers  
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:  
]
=
Flag Character (ASCII 93)  
c = Code Character (see Table 2-2)  
m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3)  
Table 2-2. Aim Code Characters  
Code  
Character  
Code Type  
Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32  
Code 128  
A
C
E
e
UPC/EAN  
RSS Family  
F
Codabar  
G
H
I
Code 93  
Code 11  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
MSI  
M
S
Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5  
Code 39 Trioptic  
Bookland EAN  
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Reference  
B-5  
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3.  
Table B-3. Modifier Characters  
Code Type  
Code 39  
Option Value  
Option  
0
1
3
4
5
No check character or Full ASCII processing.  
Reader has checked one check character.  
Reader has checked and stripped check character.  
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.  
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked  
one check character.  
7
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked  
and stripped check character.  
Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted  
as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).  
Trioptic Code 39  
Code 128  
0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.  
Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356  
0
1
2
Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.  
Function code 1 in first symbol character position.  
Function code 1 in second symbol character position.  
FNC1  
Example: ACode (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character  
in the first position,  
AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID  
I 2 of 5  
0
1
3
No check digit processing.  
Reader has validated check digit.  
Reader has validated and stripped check digit.  
Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123  
Codabar  
Code 93  
0
1
3
No check digit processing.  
Reader has checked check digit.  
Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.  
Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123  
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.  
0
Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Table B-3. Modifier Characters (Continued)  
Option Value Option  
Code Type  
MSI  
0
1
Check digits are sent.  
No check digit is sent.  
Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as  
]M14123  
D 2 of 5  
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.  
Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123  
UPC/EAN  
0
Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is 13 digits  
for UPC-A and UPC-E (not including supplemental data).  
1
2
4
Two-digit supplement data only.  
Five-digit supplement data only.  
EAN-8 data packet.  
Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905  
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.  
Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X  
Bookland EAN  
Code 11  
0
0
1
3
Single check digit  
Two check digits  
Check characters validated but not transmitted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Sample Bar Codes  
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Trioptic Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5  
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
MSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Bar Codes  
C-3  
UPC-A  
UPC-E  
UPC-E1  
0
12345 67890  
5
0 123456  
5
1 123456  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
C-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
EAN-13  
3 456789 012340  
EAN-8  
1234 5670  
Code 39  
123ABC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sample Bar Codes  
C-5  
Trioptic Code 39  
456123  
12345ABCDE  
Æ1234567890Æ  
Code 93  
Code 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
C-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Codabar  
A1234567890A  
MSI  
123456789  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
12345678912345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D
Numeric Bar Codes  
0, 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3  
2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4  
5, 6, 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
8, 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Numeric Bar Codes  
D-3  
0, 1  
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar  
code(s).  
0
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
2, 3, 4  
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar  
code(s).  
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Numeric Bar Codes  
D-5  
5, 6, 7  
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar  
code(s).  
5
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
8, 9  
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar  
code(s).  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Numeric Bar Codes  
D-7  
Cancel  
In case of an error or to change the selection, scan the bar code below.  
Cancel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
AIM  
Automatic Identification Manufacturers, Inc. is the  
trade association for manufacturers of automatic  
identification systems.  
Alphanumeric  
Aperture  
A character set that contains letters, numbers and  
other characters such as special symbols.  
The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or  
baffle that establishes the field of view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GL-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
ASCII  
American Standard Code for Information  
Interchange.  
A 7-bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters,  
numerals, punctuation marks, and control characters.  
It is a standard data transmission code in the U.S.  
Aspect Ratio  
The ratio of symbol height to symbol length in a 2-  
dimensional symbol.  
Autodiscrimination  
The ability of an interface controller to determine the  
code type of a scanned bar code. After this  
determination is made, the information content is  
decoded.  
Automatic Identification System  
The application of various technologies, such as bar  
code recognition, image recognition, voice  
recognition and RF/MW transponders, for the  
purpose of data entry into a data processing system  
and bypassing the key-entry component of traditional  
data entry.  
Background  
The area surrounding a printed symbol including the  
spaces and quiet zones.  
Bar  
The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.  
Bar Code  
An array of parallel rectangular bars and spaces  
arranged according to the encodation rules of a  
particular symbol specification in order to represent  
data in machine-readable form (i.e., Code 39).  
Bar Code Character  
Bar Code Density  
A single group of bars and spaces which represent an  
individual number, letter, punctuation mark or other  
symbol.  
The number of characters represented per unit of  
measurement (e.g., characters per inch).  
Bar Code Reader  
Bar Code Symbol  
A device used to read or decode a bar code symbol.  
The combination of symbol characters and features  
required by a particular symbology, including quiet  
zones, start and stop characters, data characters,  
check characters and other auxiliary patterns, that  
together form a complete scannable entity (see  
Symbol).  
Bar Height  
The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the  
bar width (see Y Dimension).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary GL-3  
Bar Width  
Baud Rate  
Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to  
the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the  
same bar (see X Dimension).  
A measure of the data flow or number of signaling  
events occurring per second. When one bit is the  
standard "event," this is a measure of bits per second  
(bps). For example, a baud rate of 50 means  
transmission of 50 bits of data per second.  
Bi-directional  
Binary  
Denotes that a machine-readable symbol can be read  
successfully in two directions – either backwards or  
forwards. Also identifies a scanner that can operate or  
a bar code that can be read independent of scanning  
direction.  
Denotes a numbering system to base 2 in which  
numbers are expressed as combinations of the digits  
0 and 1 with positional weighting based on powers of  
2. In computing, these can be represented electrically  
by 'off' and 'on' respectively or in machine-readable  
symbols by narrow and wide elements or by the  
absence or presence of a bar module.  
Bit  
Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary  
information. Generally, eight consecutive bits  
compose one byte of data. The pattern of 0 and 1  
values within the byte determines its meaning.  
Byte  
A sequential series of bits comprising one character  
and handled as one unit. Usually encoded in the  
ASCII format, a byte usually consists of eight bits and  
represents one alphabetic or special character, two  
decimal digits or eight binary bits.  
CDRH  
Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A  
federal agency responsible for regulating laser  
product safety. This agency specifies various laser  
operation classes based on power output during  
operation.  
CDRH Class 1  
This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification.  
This class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all  
laser output were directed into the eye's pupil. There  
are no special operating procedures for this class.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GL-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
CDRH Class 2  
No additional software mechanisms are needed to  
conform to this limit. Laser operation in this class  
poses no danger for unintentional direct human  
exposure.  
Character  
A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly  
represents data or indicates a control function, such as  
a number, letter, punctuation mark, or  
communications control contained in a message.  
Character Set  
Check Digit  
Those characters available for encoding in a  
particular bar code symbology.  
A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The  
scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic  
formula and checks that the resulting number  
matches the encoded check digit. Check digits are  
required for UPC but are optional for other  
symbologies. Using check digits decreases the  
chance of substitution errors when a symbol is  
decoded.  
Codabar  
A discrete self-checking code with a character set  
consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional  
characters: ( - $ : / , +).  
Code  
A set of unambiguous rules specifying the way in  
which data may be represented as numbers and letters  
used to represent information.  
Code 128  
A high density symbology which allows the  
controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without  
adding extra symbol elements.  
Code 3 of 9 (Code 39)  
A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code  
symbology with a set of 43 character types, including  
all uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9, and 7  
special characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code  
name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements  
representing a character are wide, while the  
remaining 6 are narrow.  
Code 49  
This symbol is a stack of 2 to 8 rows. Each row  
encodes row count information plus data characters.  
For more information, go to the AIM web site or the  
ANSI web site (see Stacked Symbol (2D Symbols)).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary GL-5  
Code 93  
An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39  
but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher  
coding density than Code 39.  
Code Length  
Codeword  
Number of data characters in a bar code between the  
start and stop characters, not including those  
characters.  
As a symbol character value, this is an intermediate  
level of coding between source data and the graphical  
encodation in the symbol.  
Concatenation  
The construction of a string of data from two or more  
strings by appending each string in succession. The  
linking or chaining together of separate items of data  
in a bar code symbol or of the data contained in two  
or more separate bar code symbols (also referred to as  
message append and structured append).  
Continuous Code  
A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the  
symbol are parts of characters. There are no  
intercharacter gaps in a continuous code. The absence  
of gaps allows for greater information density.  
Contrast  
The difference in reflectance between the black and  
white (or bar and space) areas of a symbol.  
Data Identifier  
A specified character or string of characters that  
defines the intended use of the data element that  
follows. For the purposes of automatic data capture  
technologies, data identifier refers to the  
alphanumeric identifiers as defined in ANSI  
MH10.8.2, formerly known as ANSI/FACT data  
identifiers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GL-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Data Matrix  
This error correcting, 2-dimensional matrix  
symbology is capable of encoding various character  
sets including strictly numeric data, alphanumeric  
data and all ISO 646 (ASCII) characters, as well as  
special character sets. The symbology has both error  
detection and error correction features. Each Data  
Matrix symbol consists of data regions, which  
contain nominally square modules set out in a regular  
array. A dark module is a binary 1 and a light module  
is a binary 0. There is no specified minimum or  
maximum for the X or Y dimension. The data region  
is surrounded by a finder pattern, a perimeter to the  
data region that is 1 module wide, which is  
surrounded by a quiet zone on all four sides of the  
symbol. Two adjacent sides are solid dark lines used  
primarily to define physical size, orientation and  
symbol distortion. The two opposite sides consist of  
alternating dark and light modules. These are used  
primarily to define the cell structure but also assist in  
determining physical size and distortion.  
There are 2 types of Data Matrix symbologies: ECC  
000 - 140 with several available levels of  
convolutional error correction, and ECC 200, which  
uses Reed-Solomon error correction. For ISO/IEC  
JTC 1/SC 31 purposes, only ECC 200 is  
recommended. The intellectual property rights  
associated with Data Matrix have been committed to  
the public domain.  
Data Structure  
Dead Zone  
Decode  
The stipulation of the type of information that is  
included in a bar code, such as its order and format.  
An area within a scanner's field of view, in which  
specular reflection may prevent a successful decode.  
To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN)  
and then analyze the content of the specific bar code  
scanned.  
Decode Algorithm  
A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into  
data representation of the letters or numbers encoded  
within a bar code symbol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary GL-7  
Decoder  
An electronic package that receives the signals from  
the scanning function, performs the algorithm to  
interpret the signals into meaningful data and  
provides the interface to other devices.  
Density  
Describes the relative amount of memory contained  
in a radio frequency identification tag (see Bar Code  
Density).  
Depth of Field  
The range between minimum and maximum  
distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with  
a certain minimum element width.  
Diffuse Reflection  
Discrete 2 of 5  
The component of reflected light that emanates in all  
directions from the reflecting surface.  
A binary bar code symbology representing each  
character by a group of five bars, two of which are  
wide. The location of wide bars in the group  
determines which character is encoded; spaces are  
insignificant. Only numeric characters (0 to 9) and  
START/STOP characters may be encoded.  
Discrete Code  
EAN  
A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between  
characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the  
code.  
European Article Number. This European/  
international version of the UPC provides its own  
coding format and symbology standards. Element  
dimensions are specified metrically. EAN is used  
primarily in retail.  
EAN/U.P.C.  
A fixed-length, numeric 13-digit bar code symbol  
consisting of 30 dark elements and 29 intervening  
light elements. Each character is represented by 2  
bars and 2 spaces over 7 modules. A bar may be  
comprised of 1, 2, 3 or 4 modules. Each EAN/U.P.C.  
symbol consists of a leading quiet zone, a start  
pattern, 7 left-hand data characters, a center bar  
pattern, 5 right-hand data characters, a Modulo 10  
check character, a stop pattern and a trailing quiet  
zone. U.P.C. is often considered a 12-digit code. The  
13th digit of EAN/U.P.C. symbol is a derived  
character in the left-most position. In the case of  
U.P.C., this derived left-most character is a 0.  
Element  
Generic term for a bar or space.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GL-8 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Encoded Area  
Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a  
code pattern, including start/stop characters and data.  
Error Correction  
A reader or decoder's use of mathematical schemes to  
reconstruct or replace damaged or missing symbol  
characters to enable the reading of the symbol data.  
Error Detection  
This occurs when error-correction characters detect  
that the presence of errors in the symbol exceeds the  
error correction capacity, and keeps the symbol from  
being decoded as erroneous data.  
Error-Correction Characters  
Error-Correction Level  
Symbol characters used for error correction and  
detection, calculated automatically from the other  
symbol characters.  
An indicator of the number of characters used in a  
symbology for error correction. A higher level of  
error correction allows for correcting greater  
potential symbol damage.  
Error-Detection Characters  
Fixed Beam Bar Code Reader  
Guard Bars  
Symbol characters reserved for error detection that  
are calculated automatically from the other symbol  
characters.  
A scanning device where scanning motion is  
achieved by moving the object relative to the reader;  
as opposed to a moving beam reader.  
Bars located at both ends and the center of a UPC and  
EAN symbol to provide reference points for  
scanning.  
Horizontal Bar Code  
Host Computer  
A bar code or symbol with an overall length  
dimension that is parallel to the horizon, which  
resembles a picket fence.  
A computer that serves other terminals in a network,  
providing such services as computation, database  
access, supervisory programs, and network control.  
IEC  
International Electrotechnical Commission. This  
international agency regulates laser safety by  
specifying various laser operation classes based on  
power output during operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary GL-9  
IEC (825) Class 1  
This is the lowest power IEC laser classification.  
Conformity is ensured through a software restriction  
of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000  
second window and an automatic laser shutdown if  
the scanner's oscillating mirror fails.  
Intercharacter Gap  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
The space between two adjacent bar code characters  
in a discrete code.  
A binary bar code symbology representing character  
pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved  
spaces. Interleaving provides for greater information  
density. The location of wide elements (bar/spaces)  
within each group determines which characters are  
encoded. This continuous code type uses no  
intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to 9) and  
START/STOP characters may be encoded.  
Interleaved Bar Code  
A bar code in which characters are paired together,  
using bars to represent the first character and the  
intervening spaces to represent the second.  
LASER - Light Amplification by Stimulated The laser is an intense light source. Light from a laser  
Emission of Radiation  
is all the same frequency, unlike the output of an  
incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent  
and has a high energy density.  
Laser Diode  
A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser  
connected to a power source to generate a laser beam.  
This laser type is a compact source of coherent light.  
Laser Scanner  
LED Indicator  
An optical bar code reading device using a coherent  
laser light beam as its source of illumination.  
A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting  
Diode) used as an indicator, often in digital displays.  
The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce  
light of a certain frequency determined by the  
semiconductor's particular chemical composition.  
Matrix Symbols  
A 2-dimensional array of regular polygon shaped  
cells where the center-to-center distance of adjacent  
elements is uniform. The arrangement of the cells  
represents data and/or symbology functions. Matrix  
symbols may include recognition patterns that do not  
follow the same rule as the other elements within the  
symbol (i.e., Data Matrix and MaxiCode).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GL-10 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
MIL  
1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch; a unit of measure  
often used to quantify bar code printing and scanning  
dimensions.  
Misread (Misdecode)  
Module  
A condition which occurs when the data output of a  
reader or interface controller does not agree with the  
data encoded within a bar code symbol.  
(1) The narrowest nominal width unit of measure in a  
symbol. In certain symbologies, element widths are  
specified as multiples of 1 module. Equivalent to X  
dimension; or (2) a single cell in a matrix symbology  
used to encode 1 bit of data. In MaxiCode, the module  
shape is a regular hexagon. In Data Matrix, the  
module shape is nominally square. In PDF417, the  
module shape is a regular rectangle. In bar code  
symbologies, the module shape is a regular rectangle.  
Module Check Digit or Character  
A character within the symbol data field calculated  
using modular arithmetic that is used for error  
detection. The calculated character is determined by  
applying a code algorithm to the data field contents  
(see Check Digit).  
Moving Beam Bar Code Reader  
MRD  
A device where scanning motion is achieved by  
mechanically moving the optical geometry.  
Minimum reflectance difference: a formula that is  
used to determine if there is an adequate difference  
between absorbed and reflected light.  
Nanometer  
Nominal  
Unit of measure used to define the wavelength of  
light that is equal to 10-9 meter.  
The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified  
parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and  
negative deviations from this value.  
Nominal Size  
Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN  
codes are used over a range of magnifications (e.g.,  
from 0.80 to 2.00 of nominal).  
Non-Contact Reader/Scanner  
Non-read  
Bar code readers requiring no physical contact with  
the printed symbol.  
The absence of data at the scanner output after an  
attempted scan, which is due to no code, defective  
code, scanner failure or operator error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary GL-11  
Omnidirectional  
Optical Throw  
Bar codes read in any orientation relative to the  
scanner.  
The distance from the scanner face to the closest  
point at which symbol can be read; also, optical throw  
is the difference between range and depth of field.  
Orientation  
Overhead  
The alignment of the symbol's scan path. Two  
possible orientations are horizontal with vertical bars  
and spaces (picket fence) and vertical with horizontal  
bars and spaces (ladder).  
The fixed number of characters required for start,  
stop and checking in a given symbol. For example, a  
symbol requiring a start, stop and 2 check characters  
contains 4 characters of overhead.  
Parameter  
PDF417  
A variable that can have different values assigned to  
it.  
An error correcting 2-dimensional multi-row symbol  
developed in 1992 by Symbol Technologies, PDF417  
symbols are constructed from 4 bars and 4 spaces  
over 17 modules. The symbol size is from 3 to 90  
rows. There is no specified minimum or maximum  
for X or Y dimension. With at least the recommended  
minimum level of error correction, the recommended  
Y dimension is 3X. With less than the minimum  
recommended level of error correction, the  
recommended Y dimension is 4X. A quiet zone of 2X  
is specified on each side of a symbol. Because of  
delta decode techniques, the symbology is immune  
from uniform bar width growth. PDF417 supports  
cross-row scanning. The intellectual property rights  
associated with PDF417 have been committed to the  
public domain.  
Percent Decode  
The average probability that a single scan of a bar  
code would result in a successful decode. In a well-  
designed bar code scanning system, that probability  
should approach near 100%.  
Pitch  
Rotation of a bar code symbol in an axis parallel to  
the direction of the bars.  
Plessey Code  
A pulse-width, modulated bar code commonly used  
for shelf marking in grocery stores.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GL-12 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Postnet Code  
Code developed by the U.S. Postal Service to assist in  
the automatic sorting of mail.  
Print Contrast Signal (PCS)  
Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference)  
between the bars and spaces of a symbol. A minimum  
PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be  
scannable.  
PCS = (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance  
factor of the background and RD the reflectance  
factor of the dark bars.  
Programming Mode  
Quiet Zone  
The state in which a scanner is configured for  
parameter values (see Scanning Mode).  
A clear space, containing no dark marks, which  
precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and  
follows the stop character.  
Radio Frequency  
Non-optical automatic identification devices that use  
radio waves to transmit data.  
Radio Frequency Data Communication  
(RFDC)  
Handheld or vehicle mounted units that send and  
receive messages by radio frequency. Information  
from the units is displayed on a screen for workers  
and allows real-time, two-way exchange of data  
between terminals when one terminal is mobile and  
the other is a host computer at a remote location.  
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)  
Radio Frequency Tag  
The use of small radio transponders that are activated  
by a reading transmitter. The transponder carries a  
unique ID code or other information in its memory  
and can be read at a distance without line of sight.  
An electronic tag capable of receiving, storing and/or  
transmitting digital information.  
Reflectance  
Resolution  
Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.  
The narrowest element dimension which is  
distinguished by a particular reading device or  
printed with a particular device or method.  
RSS  
Reduced Space Symbology: A family of space  
efficient symbologies developed by UCC.EAN.  
Scan Area  
Area intended to contain a symbol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary GL-13  
Scanner  
An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols  
and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to  
the bars and spaces of the symbol. Its three main  
components are:  
1. Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) -  
illuminates a bar code.  
2. Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected  
light (more light reflected from spaces).  
3. Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical  
detector output into a digitized bar pattern.  
Scanning Mode  
The scanner is energized, programmed, and ready to  
read a bar code.  
Scanning Sequence  
A method of programming or configuring parameters  
for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code  
menus.  
Self-Checking Code  
A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect  
encoding errors within the characters of a bar code  
symbol.  
Skew  
Rotation of a bar code symbol on an axis parallel to  
the symbol's length.  
Space  
The lighter element of a bar code formed by the  
background between bars.  
Space Width  
The thickness of a space measured from the edge  
closest to the symbol start character to the trailing  
edge of the same space.  
Specular Reflection  
The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a  
surface, which can cause difficulty decoding a bar  
code.  
Stacked Symbol (2D Symbols)  
Start/Stop Character  
A 2-dimensional (2D) symbol with sequences of  
linear (width-coded) data that are stacked one upon  
another (i.e., PDF417).  
A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner  
with start and stop reading instructions and scanning  
direction. The start and stop characters are normally  
to the left and right margins of a horizontal code.  
Substrate  
A foundation material on which a substance or image  
is placed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GL-14 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Symbol  
A scannable unit that encodes data within the  
conventions of a certain symbology, usually  
including start/stop characters, quiet zones, data  
characters, and check characters.  
Symbol Aspect Ratio  
Symbol Density  
The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.  
The number of data characters per unit length; usually  
expressed as characters per inch (CPI).  
Symbol Height  
Symbol Length  
The distance between the outside edges of the quiet  
zones of the first row and the last row.  
Length of symbol measured from the beginning of  
the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to the start character  
to the end of the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop  
character.  
Symbology  
The structural rules and conventions for representing  
data within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/  
EAN, Code 39).  
Tilt  
Rotation of a bar code symbol on an axis  
perpendicular to the substrate.  
Tolerance  
Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space  
width.  
2-dimensional (2D) symbology  
A machine-readable symbol which must be examined  
both vertically and horizontally to read the entire  
message. A 2D symbol may be one of two types of  
machine-readable symbols: a Matrix Symbol or a  
stacked symbol. 2D symbols differ from linear bar  
codes with the ability for high data content, small  
size, data efficiency and error correction capability.  
UCC  
Uniform Code Council: the organization that  
administers the U.P.C and other retail standards.  
UCC.EAN-128  
Code 128 with a Function 1 character in the first  
position that is the symbology used with the  
UCC.EAN format for a universal product number  
(UPN).  
UPC  
Universal Product Code. A relatively complex  
numeric symbology. Each character consists of two  
bars and two spaces, each of which is any of four  
widths. The standard symbology for retail food  
packages in the United States.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary GL-15  
Variable Length Code  
Vertical Bar Code  
A code with a number of encoded characters within a  
range, as opposed to a code with a fixed number of  
encoded characters.  
A bar code pattern presented in such orientation that  
the symbol from start to stop is perpendicular to the  
horizon. The individual bars are in an array appearing  
as rungs of a ladder.  
Visible Laser Diode (VLD)  
Wedge  
A solid state device which produces visible laser  
light.  
A device that plugs in between a keyboard and a  
terminal and allows data to be entered by a keyboard  
or by various types of scanners.  
X Dimension  
Y Dimension  
The dimension of the narrowest bar and narrowest  
space in a bar code.  
The height of the modules in a row of a 2-dimensional  
symbols.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GL-16 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47  
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76  
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54  
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88  
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . 10-60  
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82  
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34  
skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36  
skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
specific string  
A
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3, 10-28  
move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28  
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . 10-107  
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53  
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3, 10-12  
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
move cursor past a character . . . . . . . 10-32  
move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . 10-32  
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IN-2 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
data options  
pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . 9-5  
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38  
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38  
keyboard wedge  
rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105  
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3, 10-28  
alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . 10-107  
alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53  
code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3, 10-12  
default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47  
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76  
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54  
send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88  
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . 10-60  
send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82  
send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34  
skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36  
space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105  
zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
ASCII Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
alternate numeric keypad emulation 5-12  
caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
capsl ock override . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
country keyboard types (country codes) 5-  
8
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
ignore unknown characters . . . . . 5-10  
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
miscellaneous  
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
RS-232  
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
host serial response time-out . . . . 6-20  
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
RS-232 parameters  
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
RS-232C  
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
symbologies  
B
bar codes  
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . 8-60  
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index IN-3  
codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . 8-49  
codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . 8-49  
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
code 39 check digit verification . . 8-29  
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31  
code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27  
code 39 transmit check digit . . . . 8-30  
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . 8-20  
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . 8-21  
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . 8-41  
I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . 8-42  
I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . 8-42  
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . 8-53  
MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52  
MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . 8-53  
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . . . . . . . 8-15  
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
transmit code ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
UPC/EAN  
USB  
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
C
cables  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Caption Bar Code  
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24  
Send Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
codabar bar codes  
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49  
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49  
code 11 bar codes  
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
code 128 bar codes  
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
code 39 bar codes  
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29  
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24  
full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27  
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30  
code 93 bar codes  
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
code identifiers  
AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
code types  
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
supp redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
UPC/EAN/JAN  
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IN-4 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53  
D
decode zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . 9-4  
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes  
N
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
P
parameters  
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
pinouts  
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
power supply  
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
H
host types  
R
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
RS-232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
RS-232 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
RS-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 6-9  
RSS  
I
information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes  
Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . 8-55  
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41  
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42  
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42  
ISBT 128 bar codes  
S
scanner defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
scanning  
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 8-5, 9-4  
hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
sequence example . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 8-5, 9-4  
security level bar codes  
bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . 8-60  
service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi  
setup  
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
K
keyboard wedge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
keyboard wedge default parameters . . . . . . . 5-5  
keyboard wedge parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
M
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . 6-4  
connecting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
connecting keyboard wedge interface . . 5-4  
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
connecting power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
miscellaneous scanner parameters . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
MSI bar codes  
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53  
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52  
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index IN-5  
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
standard defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
symbol support center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . 8-21  
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes  
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
U
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
USB default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
USB parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
UPC/EAN bar codes  
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IN-6 WLS 8400 Product Reference Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72-67133-01  
Revision A — February 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Taser Digital Camera IT INST TC 001 User Manual
Transition Networks Network Card N FX MT 01 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Dishwasher DH040 User Manual
Uniden Network Card PCW300 User Manual
Uniden Scanner BC370CRS User Manual
Uniflame Outdoor Fireplace WAD1081W C User Manual
Viking Convection Oven DCSO244 User Manual
Viking Ventilation Hood F20470I EN User Manual
Vulcan Hart Range G36B 6T User Manual
Weed Eater Lawn Mower 168207 User Manual